JP2020130367A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance a game interest by a promotion performance.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: first operation means whose state can be shifted to a first state and a second state; second operation means different from the first operation means; confirmation control means for confirming a state of the first operation means; promotion performance execution means for executing a promotion performance for encouraging a player to operate the first operation means or the second operation means. The promotion performances comprise, a first promotion performance for displaying a first promotion image which mimics the first operation means in the first state, a second promotion performance for displaying a second promotion image which mimics the first operation means in the second state, and a third promotion performance for displaying a third promotion image for encouraging a player to operate the second operation means. The promotion performance execution means executes prescribed processing instead of processing for executing the second promotion performance, when execution of the second promotion performance is determined and it is confirmed that the first operation means is not in the first state by confirmation by the confirmation control means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 62

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result.

An operation unit that can be operated by the player, a valid period generation means that can generate a valid period that enables the operation of the operation unit, and an operation of the operation unit during the generation of the valid period. A game machine equipped with a promotion effect means capable of executing a promotion effect is known (
For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2015-054095

However, with the conventional game machine, it has not been possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the game by the promotion effect.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by a promotion effect.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result.
A first operating means that can be converted into a first state and a second state,
A second operating means different from the first operating means,
A confirmation control means for confirming the state of the first operating means and
A promotion effect executing means for executing a promotion effect for urging the player to operate the first operation means or the second operation means is provided.
The promotion effect is
A first promotion effect in which a first promotion image imitating the first operation means in the first state is displayed, and
A second promotion effect in which a second promotion image imitating the first operation means in the second state is displayed, and
Including a third promotion effect in which a third promotion image for prompting the operation of the second operation means is displayed.
When the execution of the second promotion effect is determined and the confirmation by the confirmation control means confirms that the first operation means is not in the first state, the promotion effect execution means is used.
It is characterized in that a predetermined process is executed instead of the process of executing the second promotion effect.

According to the present invention, the interest of the game can be enhanced by the promotion effect.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display device. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the common processing of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead jackpot determination process. Special Figure 1 is a flowchart illustrating game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the fall lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 1 information setting process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 2 information setting process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the time shortening fluctuation number update process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1 and the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the process in small hit fanfare. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a small hit end process. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of ROM which a game control device has. It is a figure explaining the jackpot determination. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining the variable command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot system command processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation promotion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation promotion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation promotion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation promotion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation promotion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation promotion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation promotion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the explanatory effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the explanatory effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a battle production. It is a figure which shows an example of a battle production. It is a figure which shows an example of a battle production. It is a figure which shows an example of the transformation example 1 of a battle production. It is a figure which shows an example of transformation example 1 of a battle production. It is a figure which shows an example of transformation example 1 of a battle production. It is a figure which shows an example of the transformation example 2 of a battle production. It is a figure which shows an example of the transformation example 2 of a battle production. It is a figure which shows an example of the transformation example 2 of a battle production.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (
It is assembled to the support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) has a front frame 1
It is stored in a storage unit (not shown) formed on the front side of 2. In addition, the front frame (main body frame) 1
The second is a glass frame 15 (with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30).
A transparent plate holding frame) is attached.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, and decorations, effects, and notifications when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (which supplies a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown))
(Reservoir), the upper plate ball outlet 22 from which the game balls paid out from the payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 flow out, and the upper plate 21 paid out with the upper plate 21 full. A lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing and an operation unit 24 for a hitting ball launching device are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 21
On the upper edge, the effect button switch 25a for receiving the pressing operation input from the player
An effect button 25 with a built-in effect is provided. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25.
Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, to the right of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge that is operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the game machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. To do. In addition, the player can use the effect button 25 and the touch panel 2
By operating 9, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is a flat plate-shaped game board main body 8 that serves as a mounting base for various members.
It has 0. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. The game area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to launch a game ball from a hitting ball launching device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed. Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path roll. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36, the game ball rolled on the starting winning opening 36 can easily win the starting winning opening 36.
In addition, a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating is provided on the upper part of the center case 40. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

On the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (not shown), and the movable member always holds a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the game ball is easily flowed into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device (game). It can be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person.

In the present embodiment, the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is the normal solenoid solenoid 37.
It is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that opens and closes by advancing and retreating (sliding) in the front-rear direction by c, but the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is not limited to this. Ordinary variable winning device 3
The movable member 7 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side by the normal electric solenoid 37c, or a reverse "c" by the normal electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in the shape of "".
Further, the normal variable winning device 37 can win a game ball even when the movable member is closed, and the game ball may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state.

Of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball is not accepted or easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 is provided. In the first special variable winning device 38, the opening / closing member (not shown) moves forward and backward (slides).
By doing so, the upper prize opening is converted into a state in which game balls can flow in. 1st special variable winning device 3
In No. 8, the player is given a predetermined value by converting the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game and facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening. The game value (prize ball) is given. The game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3).

Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), a specific area where game balls can flow in is provided, and a lever solenoid 38f is provided so as to change the inflow probability of the game ball into the specific area.
A lever member that operates according to (see FIG. 3) is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 3) capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d, a state advantageous for the player can be obtained. It occurs (in the present embodiment, a high probability state occurs after the end of the special game state). The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38.

Further, inside the upper prize opening, a residual ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 3) is provided to detect a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area. ing. The number of game balls detected by the large prize opening switch 38a provided inside the upper large prize opening (the number of game balls that have flowed into the upper large winning opening), the specific area switch 38d, and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38.
By matching the number of game balls detected in e (the number of game balls discharged from the upper prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize opening are discharged, and basically this confirmation. Until the end of the event, the new top prize opening will not be opened.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, a second special variable winning can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower prize opening) 39 is provided. 2nd special variable winning device 3
In No. 9, the opening / closing member (not shown) moves back and forth (slides) in the front-rear direction to convert the lower prize opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower large winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the lower large winning opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 3).

The game area 32 below the start winning opening 36 is provided with an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won in the winning opening or the like. Further, the game board main body 80 is outside the game area 32.
In the lower right corner of, the special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game)
And a batch display device 50 for executing a normal map variation display game is provided.

The batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like.
It consists of a special figure 1 display (1st special figure variation display unit) 51 for a variable display game, a special figure 2 display (2nd special figure variable display unit) 52 for a special figure 2 variable display game, and an LED lamp. The first storage display unit 53 for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second storage display unit 54 for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game composed of LED lamps are displayed. Be prepared.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39), and is advantageous to the player among left-handed (normal) and right-handed. A first game state display unit 56 for notifying a hitting method (a hitting method corresponding to a game state) and a probability display unit 57 for notifying a probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of a special figure variation display game are provided. There is. The batch display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when a jackpot occurs to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.
Further, a normal map display unit 58 for displaying the normal map fluctuation display game, a storage display unit 59 for notifying the start memory number of the normal map fluctuation display game, and a time saving state that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state. A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven. It is displayed that it is changing, and special figure 1
It is configured so that it can be distinguished from the special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "off", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition) is turned on as the result mode of the off, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode of the hit is turned on and the game result is displayed.

The first storage display unit 53 turns off a plurality of LEDs for the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the starting winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. ,lighting blinking)
Is displayed by.
The second storage display unit 54 is a normal fluctuation winning device 37 which is a fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52.
Of the number of winning balls, the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) is set by turning off and turning on multiple LEDs (
(Blinking) to display.
The round display unit 55 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and turns on the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn it on. The round display unit 55 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

The first game state display unit 56 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, in the case of a game state in which left-handed hitting is more advantageous to the player than right-handed hitting (normal hitting), all the LEDs are turned off and left. When right-handed is more advantageous to the player than right-handed (when right-handed), all LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and for example, the probability state of a big hit is a low probability state (
In the case of the normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and when the jackpot probability state is the high probability state (probability change state), all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that comprehensively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
It includes a U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operating clock of a CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-DC that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a converter, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage, and a game microcomputer 1
A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 11 in the event of a power failure,
It has a power failure monitoring circuit, and includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the occurrence and recovery of a power failure in the game control device 100.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to exclude the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power failure. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information about the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It serves as a means for retaining the memory of game information.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is provided with M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. When the special result mode is adopted, the gaming state is advantageous for the player (special gaming state).
At the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed in the game machine 10.
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display is performed. No display mode. The reach state also includes, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state of identification information,
However, the special result mode may be set to the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value is no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <
It is getting higher in the order of premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the game microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random generation to generate variation pattern random numbers for determining various reach and variation display game execution time in non-reach variation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the general clock variation display game. It is provided with a circuit and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of a random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of start storages and the like. Here, CPU111A
Is a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, and a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37. The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the large winning opening switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39, and the gate switch in the general drawing start gate 34. 34a, a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e arranged in the first special variable winning device 38, and an out ball detection switch 32a that detects all game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game. Connected to
An interface chip (proximity I) that inputs a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.
/ F) 121 is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wires of the sensor and proximity switch are illegally shorted, the sensor and switch are disconnected from the connector, and the lead wires are cut and floated. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a and the gate switch 3
The detection signal of 4a is input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharge switch 38e, and the out ball detection switch 3
The detection signal of 2a is input to the fourth input port 126. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, a detection signal of the vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10,
The detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are also input. It has become so.

Further, a signal from the setting key switch 152 for detecting the operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124. The setting key operation unit has a keyhole for inserting the setting key.
It is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it has been turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is turned to the second position, and is not turned to the second position. In some cases, it goes off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values that give special results in the special figure variation display game are assigned, and operate these operation units. As a result, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result is assigned in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game. There is. Here, six probability setting values, "setting 1" to "setting 6", are prepared.

When selecting the probability setting value, R with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position.
By turning on the power of the game machine while operating (pressing) the AM initialization switch 112, the probability setting value can be changed to the probability setting value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated during the probability setting value change mode ( The probability setting value can be changed by pressing). The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays the probability set value information while the operation related to the probability set value is being performed (during the probability set value change mode and the probability set value confirmation mode), and other than that. In, the calculated base value and the accessory ratio are displayed.

In addition, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position (RAM initialization switch 11).
By turning on the power of the game machine in (2 is not operated), the probability setting value currently selected is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability setting value cannot be changed. The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and displays the probability set value as a number from 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. In addition, other types of display devices such as liquid crystal display devices may be used.
The probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a) are the main board 100.
Is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37
The detection signal of a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is an enable signal CE by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided on the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is used for each port 122, 123, of the input unit 120.
It is not supplied to 124 and 126. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent system malfunction, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61, the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test device via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the machine cannot control the game. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is a first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38, and a second large winning opening solenoid (large) for opening the second special variable winning device 39. Winning port solenoid 2) 39b, 1st special variable winning device 38
The operation data of the lever solenoid 38f that operates the lever member inside and the normal electric solenoid 37c that opens the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is output, and the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability setting value is displayed. This is a port for output.
Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. On / on the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the game machine 10, such as jackpot information, from the external information terminal plate 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the peripheral solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. It is output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135. The external information signal supplied from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137 that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 to the external device such as the management device is sent to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d to output and a fifth driver 138e to generate and output a drive signal by receiving the display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 are provided. Data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. The fifth driver 138e has a D as a power supply voltage so that the performance display device 153 operating at 5 V can be driven.
C5V is supplied from the power supply device 400.
Further, the second driver 138b for driving the segment line of the batch display device 50 is equipped with DC1.
2V is supplied. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 500. Photocoupler 13
Reference numeral 9 denotes a game microcomputer 111, which is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication with the inspection device 500. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, 126 are provided. Absent.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36,
The start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, and the gate switch 34a in the ordinary variable winning device 37 are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , Sound source LSI314 that controls the sound output to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the processors 19a and 19b.
Is equipped with.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
Program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (programmable read-only memory), RAM 322 that provides a work area, Fe that can retain stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure.
A RAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, and V
It executes processing such as instructing the content of the output video to the DP 312, instructing the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lighting the decorative lamp, controlling the drive of the motor and the solenoid, and managing the effect time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal INT from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is to be entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). Frame decoration LED control circuit 333, game board 3 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an provided LED (light emitting diode).
Board effect device 44 (for example, display device 41) provided at 0 (including the center case 40)
A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control a movable accessory (such as a movable accessory) that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display in. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. A function that detects the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to or an electronic component controlled by the motor. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Further, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage like the above, DC 3.3V is based on DC 5V.
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be usually provided in the power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPRESET signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control the lamp and the motor are supplied to reset the state. Further, the effect control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the game machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when the N45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

FIG. 5 shows the jackpot probability, the fall probability, the small hit probability, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. Further, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory.
In this specification, it is used as a term having the same meaning.

The value (probability value) of the jackpot probability, which is the probability of becoming a jackpot (first special result), is special figure 1 and special figure 2.
The probability value in the low probability state and the probability value in the high probability state are the probability values as shown in FIG. 5A, respectively.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the same probability value is assigned as the probability value in the high probability state to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6", but different probabilities. A value may be assigned. That is, the probability value in the high probability state may be switchable in multiple stages.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the same probability value is assigned to "setting 1" and "setting 2" as the probability value in the low probability state, but different probability values are assigned. It may be assigned. The same applies to "setting 3" and "setting 4", and "setting 5" and "setting 6". That is, the probability value in the low probability state is not limited as long as it can be switched in multiple stages. Further, the same probability value may be assigned to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as the probability value in the low probability state. That is, the probability value in the low probability state may not be switchable in multiple stages.

Further, the effect distribution and the like may be different between "setting 1" and "setting 2" having the same probability value in the assigned low probability state. The same applies to "setting 3" and "setting 4", and "setting 5" and "setting 6".
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, there are six probability setting values (“setting 1”) for three types of probability values (probability value in the low probability state and probability value in the high probability state). "~" Setting 6 ") is assigned, but for example, three probability setting values (for example," setting 1 ") are assigned to three types of probability values.
~ "Setting 3") may be assigned and the remaining three probability setting values (for example, "Setting 4" to "Setting 6") may be omitted.

In the game machine of the present embodiment, in the special game state based on the big hit (first special game state), the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific area switch 38d. By being performed (passing V), the high probability state is set after the end of the special game state, and the low probability state is set when the fall lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed is won. The probability of winning the fall lottery is as shown in FIG. 5 (b).
Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 5 (c). This small hit probability is higher in Special Figure 2 than in Special Figure 1. In addition, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not won in duplicate. In the present embodiment, the small hit is not provided in the special figure 1 but is provided only in the special figure 2, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, but the small hit is not limited to this, for example. May be provided in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. Further, when the small hit is provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hit probability may be the same in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 is better than the special figure 1. May be higher, and special figure 1 may be higher than special figure 2.

In addition, FIG. 5D shows the jackpot types that can be selected in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the distribution probabilities of each jackpot type.
Special figure 1 The types of jackpots (first special result) in the variable display game are 10R probability variation jackpot and 4
There are three types: R probability variation jackpot and 10R normal jackpot. Similarly, there are three types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot. These jackpot types are selected based on the jackpot symbol random numbers. The number of each jackpot type indicates the actual number of rounds, and the probability change indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into a specific area (probability change operation area) and is likely to become a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state. , It is shown that the possibility that the game ball flows into the specific area (probability change operation area) is low and it is difficult to reach the high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state.
Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds for which opening control is performed so that a winning ball is actually generated by opening the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The number of each jackpot type is the number of rounds at the time of jackpot (the number of actual rounds + the number of rounds in which the opening time of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is short and the opening control is performed so that the winning ball does not actually occur). You may.

In addition, a first special result may be provided in which the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area is lower than that of the probability variation jackpot, but the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area is higher than that of the normal jackpot.
Further, in the game machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball is in the high probability state depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific area (probability change operation area), so that even if the jackpot type is the probability change, it can be specified. If the game ball does not flow into the area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, if the game ball flows into the specific area, the high probability state occurs.

6 (a) to 6 (c) show the opening mode in each round for each jackpot type. The details of the opening mode are shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 6A, in the 10R probability variation jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and the specific area (probability variation operation area) is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed.
Long opening with V is an opening mode in which a game ball is likely to flow into a specific region (probability variation operating region). Then, after the second round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and a long opening without V is performed.
As shown in FIG. 6B, in the 4R probability variation jackpot, the first special variation winning device 3 in the first round.
A long opening with V is performed to open 8 and open a specific area (probability variation operation area). Then, from the 2nd round to the 4th round, the 1st special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened. A long opening without V is performed, and after the 5th round, the 1st special variable winning device 3
Open 8 but do not open a specific area V-less short release is performed. The short opening without V is an opening mode in which the possibility that the game ball will flow into the winning opening is lower than the long opening without V. That is, the long opening without V is an opening mode in which a winning ball is actually generated, and the short opening without V is an opening mode in which the opening time is short and no winning ball is actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 6 (c), in the 10R normal jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and the specific region (probability variation operating region) is opened in the first round, and a short opening with V is performed. Short opening with V is an opening mode in which there is a possibility that a game ball may flow into a specific region (probability variation operating region), which is lower than long opening with V. Then, from the second round onward, a long opening without V is performed to open the first special variable winning device 38.
It is V that the game ball can flow into the specific area (probability change operation area) in the first round.
Yes long open and V Yes short open only. That is, in the game machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is the round in which the game ball may flow into the specific area, is the first round. The specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. Also,
The specific round may be multiple times, such as the first round and the fifth round.

As shown in FIG. 7A, in the long opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25,000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (
For example, if any of the conditions for winning 9 game balls is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 3
8 is closed to end the round (t12). After that, the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper prize opening is started (t12), and when the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper prize opening is finished, the interval time is started (t12).
At t13), when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t14). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 7B, in the long opening with V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Furthermore, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38
The f is set to the ON state, and the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers a specific area and the game ball cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retracts from the specific area and the game ball can flow in. It becomes. Further, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is effective is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 38d, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 msec has elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, the game ball that has won a prize immediately after the first special variable winning device 38 is opened may flow into a specific area.

200 msec after the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t).
34). Then, after 2700 msec, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (
t35), when either the openable time of 25,000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. (T39). After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t39), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t41), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t42). .. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, after the second opening (t35) of the first special variable winning device 38, the lever solenoid 3
8f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). In addition, the specific area switch 38d is also effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is for a sufficiently long time, and the lever solenoid 38f remains ON for a long time, so that the game ball will almost certainly flow into the specific area. Become. Therefore, when the jackpot type is probabilistic, it will almost certainly be in a high probability state.

Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be turned on for a predetermined time even after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variable winning device 38 just before closing. It is possible for the game ball to flow into a specific area. The first special variable winning device 38 is due to the passage of the openable time or the winning of a predetermined number of game balls.
Is closed, and when all the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening, the lever solenoid 38f is accompanied by the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41). Is turned off to end the operation, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.

In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 have the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening. If all of the lever solenoid 38f is discharged by the end of the period (t43) when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and operates when the discharge is completed. Is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.
In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 have the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening. If all of the lever solenoid 38f is not discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43) is completed. The lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is terminated. In this case, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t44) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43).

As shown in FIG. 7 (c), in the short opening with V, the opening similar to the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the long opening with V is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. The round ends based on (t54). Since the opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is for a very short time and the lever solenoid 38f is also ON for a short time, it is unlikely that the game ball will flow into the specific region. Therefore, it is rare that a high probability state occurs when the jackpot type is normal.

The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the activation / invalidation of the specific area switch 38d are the same as in the case of long opening with V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 ( t55-t63). Therefore, if the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time of the remaining ball of the upper prize opening has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. The operation is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid. If all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period (t62) when the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, the lever solenoid 3
At the end of the period in which 8f is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state and the operation is terminated, and after the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state (t62).
After 100 msec, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

Further, the first opening (t31 to t34) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the long opening with V shown in FIG. 7 (b) and the first special variation in the short opening with V shown in FIG. 7 (c). The opening of the winning device 38 (t51 to t54) is set to an opening time such that at least one game ball can be won by the first special variable winning device 38.

As shown in FIG. 7D, in the V-less short opening, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (t71) with the start of the round, and the openable time of 200 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). ) When any of the conditions for winning the game ball is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 38
Closes and ends the round (t72). However, since the openable time is short, it is rare that a predetermined number of prizes, which are the closing conditions, occur, and in most cases, the prize is closed as the openable time elapses. After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t72), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t73), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t74). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, FIG. 6D shows an opening mode in the second special gaming state (special gaming state based on small hits). In the second special game state, first, the small hit fanfare time is started,
When the small hit fanfare time ends, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, and 160
The second special variable winning device 39 is closed when either the openable time of 0 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls are won. After that, the small hit remaining ball processing time is started, when the small hit remaining ball processing time ends, the small hit ending time starts, and when the small hit ending time ends, the second special game state ends. The second
There may be a plurality of types of opening / closing modes (opening time and number of opening times) in the special game state, and in that case, for example, it is determined which opening / closing mode is set (adopted) based on the small hit symbol.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the present embodiment.
The game state includes the normal game state ST1, the first specific game state ST2, and the second specific game state ST.
There are three. In addition to this, as special game states, there are a first special game state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability from which the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, and the main in the game state. The main starting area, which is the starting area to be aimed at, the main variable special map, which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for a prize in the starting winning opening 36 by hitting the left side, and aiming for a prize in the ordinary variable winning device 37 by hitting the right side. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. In addition, each game state is designed on the assumption that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly played, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to proceed mainly with the special figure variation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, the special figure probability is low, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game or normal Figure Fluctuation display There is no time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. In addition, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. In this normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state ST1. ..

In the second specific game state ST3, the special figure probability is basically a low probability state. However, in the special game state based on the normal jackpot, when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 (when the V passes), the probability state becomes high. In addition, there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is a normal power support, it will be possible to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal map fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the chance mode. Further, the main variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37.
That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In the first specific game state ST2, the special figure probability is high, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure changing display game. There is a certain amount of time to shorten the fluctuation time of. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is small hit RUSH. Further, the main variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the normal map fluctuation display game in the state with the normal power support (normal probability) is the same probability as the state without the normal power support (normal probability). In a state where there is a normal power support, the normal probability can be set to a higher probability (high probability state of the normal figure) than the normal probability (low probability state of the normal figure).
Further, in the present embodiment, the state without the normal electric support means that the normal variable winning device 37 is opened, but the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 is shorter than the state with the normal electric support. is there.

In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal game state ST1, and the right-handed hit is performed to perform the normal variation winning device 37. It is advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at. The special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 variable display game (in the case of this embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0), and the small hit is won more than the big hit. Since there is a high probability that the game will occur, small hits occur frequently in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3.
When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, the state in which the normal electric support is provided continues even in the special game state based on the small hit, and in the first specific game state ST2. If the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the state without the normal electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small hit. Further, in the special gaming state based on the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variable winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 6D).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, in the special game state based on the small hit, most of the right-handed game balls are normally variable prizes. A second device that wins the device 37 and is arranged below the normal variable winning device 37.
It does not flow down to the special variable winning device 39. Therefore, in the second specific game state ST3, small hits occur frequently, but it is difficult to increase the number of balls held by the player due to the small hits.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the first specific game state ST2, most of the right-handed game balls in the special game state based on the small hit are normally variable winnings. Instead of winning the device 37, it flows down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the number of game balls of the player by a small hit. That is, in the first specific game state ST2, small hits occur frequently and the number of balls held by the player increases. Therefore, the effect mode is small hit RUSH.
It is said to be a mode called.

Of these three gaming states, the normal gaming state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific gaming state ST3 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state ST1 because it has a general electric support. The first specific game state ST2 is a high probability state, and further
Since the number of balls held by the player increases due to the frequent occurrence of small hits, this is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result, exhausting the specified number of games, and winning the fall lottery which is the transition lottery to the low probability state. .. Basically, the probability variation jackpot is derived to enter the first special gaming state, and in the first special gaming state, the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38 and the specific area switch. When it is detected in 38d (when V is passed), it shifts to the first specific gaming state ST2 after the end of the first special gaming state. On the other hand, when the probability variation jackpot is derived and the first special gaming state is set, and the game ball does not flow into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the first special gaming state (no V passage). In the case of), the normal gaming state ST1 is entered after the end of the first special gaming state. In addition, when the normal jackpot is derived and the first special gaming state is reached and V is not passed in the first special gaming state, the second specific gaming state ST3 (special figure low probability) is obtained after the end of the first special gaming state. Second specific game state ST
Move to 3). On the other hand, when the normal jackpot is derived and the first special gaming state is reached, and there is a V passage in the first special gaming state, the second specific gaming state ST3 (special figure high probability) after the end of the first special gaming state. It shifts to the second specific game state ST3).
Further, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST3, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Also, the first
If the fall lottery is won in the specific game state ST2, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. Also,
When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, it is simply called a hit (special result). Further, when the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is performed by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) toward the gaming area 32 from a hitting ball launching device (not shown). The launched game ball is
The game area 32 is flowed down while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening 36
, Ordinary variable winning device 37, first special variable winning device 38 or second special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. .. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and launches a game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the starting winning opening 36 or the left side of the starting winning opening 36 It is possible to aim for a prize in the arranged general prize opening 35, and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the first special variable winning It is possible to aim for a prize in the device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 arranged on the right side of the second special variable winning device 39.

A gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 is provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and the game area 32
When the game ball driven into the inside passes through the start gate 34 of the normal drawing, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start storages is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. If it is less than)
), And one memory for starting the normal drawing is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of stored prizes for starting the normal map is displayed on the normal map hold display 56 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random number value (hit random number value) for determining the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal figure start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory of starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game. Then, the process of starting the normal map variation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time in the normal map display unit 58 provided in the batch display device 50 as a process of executing the normal map variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the variable display game of the normal map, which stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result, is performed.
In addition, the general drawing display unit 58 is composed of a display device 41, and as ordinary identification information, for example, numbers, symbols, etc.
A character symbol or the like may be used to display the variable for a predetermined time, and then stop and display the result.

When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern which is a special result mode is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display unit 58, and the normal variable winning device 37 is operated by operating the normal electric solenoid 37c. Control is performed to open the device for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control executing means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display unit 58 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the deviation.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) of the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is set.
The second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory and the second start memory. Then, the stored number of the start memory is the first storage display unit 53 (special figure 1 hold display) and the second memory display unit 54 (special figure 2 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50. Is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special drawing start memory display.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 display 52 (1st variation display device) is based on the second start memory. The special figure 2 variable display game is played on the second variable display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game becomes the first special result (big hit). In that case, one of the special figure variation display games is terminated as a result other than the special result (missing result). In addition, if the other special figure variation display game has a second special result (small hit) during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the one is concerned until the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit. The special figure fluctuation display game of is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area). It serves as a first execution control means for controlling. Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is
It serves as a second execution control means for controlling the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area).

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state).
Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode). Then, it becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, special figure 1
The display 51 serves as a first variable display means capable of displaying the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second variable display means capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37.

Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a jackpot game state (first special game state).
After the end of, control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hitting is high and there is a general electric support). It is possible to do. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms the specific game state generating means.

In addition, the display device 41 corresponds to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.
A decorative special figure variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) is being executed. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 changes the decoration identification information in accordance with the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). It serves as a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. In addition, game machine 1
The special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 at 0.

In the game machine of the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game (the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is 0), but it is special in the normal gaming state. FIG. 2 Fluctuation display A long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player to hit left to aim at the start winning opening 36 and play the special figure 1 variable display game.
The length variation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). Further, the time of the long fluctuation may be different depending on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Specifically, for example, when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is out of order or a small hit, a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of about 10 minutes is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Special Figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the special figure 2
A long variation with a variation time of about 5 minutes may be selected as the variation pattern of the variation display game.

Hereinafter, control of a game machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the game control device 10
The control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of 0 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 9, first, a process for disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer, which is the start address of an area for saving values such as registers when an interrupt occurs. Stack pointer setting process (step X2)
I do. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and a predetermined register (for example, D) is specified.
The upper address of the RAM start address is set in the register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper rank is 00h.
Or 01h is taken, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, the game control device 1 serving as the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value.
Waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the slave control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instruction from 00 to start normally
Is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can be prevented from missing a command. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the power of the gaming machine is supplied. Wait for it to be blocked.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. Determine if there is any. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the set number of checks. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54 described later. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power failure are retained. Therefore, when a power failure occurs here, backup processing is performed. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when a power failure has not occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10).
If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, when the waiting time ends,
Permission is given to RWM (read / write memory) that can be read and written in RAM, EEPROM, etc. (step X11), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X13), and the game microcomputer. A process (step X14) for activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator is a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 1 based on the divided signal.
It includes a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit for 11A.
Next, the RAM error flag is set (step X15). Here, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X16), and if it is normal (step X16; Y),
Power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) in which the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal
Is determined (step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), the checksum calculation process (step X18) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed, and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), the step. Based on the state read by X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21). Then, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the effect control board (effect control) issues a main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal. It is transmitted to the device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, when the RAM error flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), the main abnormality error notification command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag set before the occurrence of a power failure. That is, if the power of the game machine is cut off and restarted while the probability setting value is being changed,
Since the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). As a result, in the performance display device 153,
The display as shown in FIG. 13 (h) is performed. After that, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26).
, Return to step X25.

Further, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). Then, when the RAM error flag is not set (step X27).
; N) is set to the probability setting changing flag (step X29). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. The effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting change, displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and speaks 1.
Notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is performed by outputting voice by 9a and 19b.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes “setting 1”. After that, step X29,
The process of X30 is performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (Tep X22; N and step X23). In N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). Then, when the setting key switch 152 is not in the ON state (step X35; N).
), It is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the ON state (step X43; N)
That is, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the off state, the process proceeds to step X41 to perform the process when the power failure is normally restored.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step X43).
In Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make a means of conversion.

When the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state (step X35; Y), the probability setting checking flag is set (step X36). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode. After that, the command during the probability setting confirmation is issued to the effect control board (effect control device 300).
(Step X37). The effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting confirmation, and the display of the display device 41, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46
Due to the light emission, the operation of the board effect device 44, the output of sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
Notifies that the probability set value is being confirmed.

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 msec or longer, the value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) of the timer interrupt process in the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, and in other cases, the external information edit of the timer interrupt process is edited. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, 12
When the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 8 msec, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is output for 128 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode. To. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 ms. However, at least 5 after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode.
Since it is necessary to output a security signal for 0 msec, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the determination is not made based on the state read in step X6 (state at power-on), but the state read in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) (current state). Judgment based on. When it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
When the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X34), and when no power failure has occurred (step X34;
In N), the process returns to step X33, and if a power failure occurs (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting changing flag is set, in step X23 of the main process (FIGS. 9 and 10) after the power failure is restored. It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process for disabling interrupts (step X38) is performed. Processing to allow interrupts (step X32)
) To the process of disabling interrupts (steps X38 and X55), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms). In the timer interrupt process, the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122), which is a process related to the probability set value.
) Is performed. That is, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). The effect control device 300 is based on receiving a command to end the notification.
The execution notification (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is terminated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Is the area to be initialized (eg, power outage inspection area,
A power failure recovery process (step X41) is performed to save the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the checksum area and the area related to error fraud monitoring. The probability setting checking flag is cleared in this step X41.
After that, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of model designation commands, probability setting information commands, special figure 1 hold number commands, special figure 2 hold number commands, probability information commands, effect count information commands, screen designation commands, etc. Send a command. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress, the command is waiting for a customer. Send the command of the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. In addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted depending on the model.

On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step X44, the RAM area for the probability set value (work area (1 byte area of the probability set value)) and the RAM area for performance display (display of base value and accessory ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, clear the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in this step X44. In step X44,
You may or may not clear the stack area or unused area.

Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X45).
.. The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X46). In the case of the present embodiment, in step X46, a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect number information command, and a RAM initialization command (waiting for customers). Along with displaying the demo screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands,
It also sends a command for the number of times of production, a command for the number of times of support, which is information on the number of times the special figure variation display game with Fukuden support is executed.

Next, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on.
Various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the winning symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (winning random number) ), R as the initial value (start value) of the random number (fall lottery random number) that determines whether or not to win the fall lottery
After saving in the predetermined area of WM (step X48), enable interrupt (step X4).
9). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X50) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a unit. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. The random numbers are +1 or -1.
It may be a counter-type update by, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear in pieces without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.
In the present embodiment, since a random number (hit symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the normal figure is not provided, there is only one type of hit symbol of the normal figure, but a hit symbol random number is provided and the hit symbol of the normal figure is provided. May be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number update process in step X50, a process for disabling interrupts (step X51)
Is performed, and the performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54), and if no power failure has occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process is performed. (Step X5
Return to 0). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process, the performance display editing process, and the power failure monitoring are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X50) (step X49), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step X50, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and if such a method is adopted, the initial value in both of them. In order to avoid executing the random number update process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process.
When the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

On the other hand, when a power failure occurs (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X59) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X60) for saving the calculated checksum, the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X61), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.
Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (RAM 111C) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.
The game control device 100) is provided, and the operating state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and FIG. 11
Timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X1).
01). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and when the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y). , Probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122)
Is performed to end the timer interrupt processing.
On the other hand, when both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are based on the output data set in various processes. , Lever solenoid 38f, Fuden solenoid 37
Output processing (step X105) for performing drive control of the actuator such as c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step X106), the random number update process 1 (step X107), which outputs the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200,
Random number update process 2 (step X108) is performed. After that, monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, setting the prize ball, the front frame and the glass The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X109) for opening the frame and monitoring errors such as illegal winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) in the first special variable winning device 38 is The number of game balls that have flowed into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 38a) is exceeded. If an abnormal discharge is occurring, the abnormal discharge flag is set. Then, when an abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, when abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the start port 1 switch 3
Start port switch monitoring process (step X) to monitor the winning of 6a and start port 2 switch 37a
111). In the start port switch monitoring process, the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37
Various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball. And special figure 1
Special figure 1 game processing (step X112) that performs processing related to the variable display game, special figure 2 game processing (step X113) that performs processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and normal figure game processing that performs processing related to the normal figure variable display game. (Step X114) is performed, and a segment LED provided on the game machine 10 to display a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game.
Segment LED editing process (step X115) that drives the display to display the desired content.
I do.

Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process (step X116) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality, and a process that checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality. Radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring process (step X118) that checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine if there is any abnormality, and determines whether abnormal discharge has occurred. Perform the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step X119). Further, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer and performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display monitor 153 are performed, and the timer interrupt processing is completed. To do.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. Automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
FIG. 12 shows the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X1) in the timer interrupt process described above.
22) is shown. In this probability setting change / confirmation process, first, it is determined whether the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (range 0 to 5 in this embodiment) (step X13).
1).
When the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y)
The probability setting value display data corresponding to the value (current probability setting value) of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is set (step X132), and the probability setting value display data is transmitted to the second output port. Output to the fifth driver 138e via 134 (step X134). This will
In the performance display device 153, the display as shown in FIGS. 13A to 13F is performed.
On the other hand, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131).
In N), turn-off data is set as the probability set value display data (step X133),
The probability set value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, in the performance display device 153, FIG. 13 (g)
The display as shown in is performed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the performance display device 153 is composed of four 7-segment displays (7-segment type display) arranged side by side. In the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the current probability setting value is shown on the rightmost 7-segment display among these four 7-segment displays, and the remaining 7-segment display shows "SET". "Is supposed to indicate the character.
Specifically, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "0", the current probability setting value is "setting 1", so as shown in FIG. 13A, the rightmost 7 When "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "1", the current probability setting value is "1".
Since it is "setting 2", "2" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13 (b), and when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "2", it is currently Probability setting value of "Setting 3"
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13 (c), "3" is displayed on the 7-segment display at the right end, and the RW is displayed.
When the value of the area for the probability setting value in M is "3", the current probability setting value is "setting 4", so that "setting 4" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13 (d). 4 ”is displayed, and when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is“ 4 ”, the current probability setting value is“ setting 5 ”, so as shown in FIG. 13 (e), the right end When "5" is displayed on the 7-segment display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "5", the current probability setting value is "setting 6", so FIG.
As shown in 3 (f), "6" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display. Further, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range (abnormal value), the rightmost 7-segment display is turned off as shown in FIG. 13 (g).
For example, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "0", the probability setting value display data is "1" in the first digit, "T" in the second digit, and the third digit. The probability set value display data instructing to display "E" and "S" in the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", the security signal control timer is updated by -1 (step X1).
35). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Next, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X136). In step X136, the on-data of the security signal is output regardless of whether or not the security signal control timer is timed up. Therefore, the security signal will continue to be output during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode (while the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirmation flag is set).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Ends the probability setting change / confirmation process. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process during execution is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. It is determined whether it is a confirmation process (step X138).

If it is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is not the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; N).
Determines if there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139).
In step X139, the RAM initialization switch 1 is performed in the immediately preceding input process (step X103).
When an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of 12 is detected, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112. If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends.

On the other hand, when there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y),
That is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5 (step X140), and the probability setting change / confirmation process is performed. finish. The value updated in step X140 (probability setting value after update) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change / confirmation process.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, “setting 1” to “setting 6” are used for three types of probability values (probability value in a low probability state and probability value in a high probability state). However, for example, "setting 1" to "setting 3" may be assigned to three types of probability values (probability value in a low probability state and probability value in a high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the region for the probability setting value of RWM is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 2.

By operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the mode can be shifted to the probability setting value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated during the probability setting value change mode. You can change the probability setting value with.
Since the RAM initialization switch 112 can only perform a pressing operation, it is not possible to distinguish between a transition operation for shifting to the probability set value change mode and a change operation for changing the probability set value. Therefore, when the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode) continues even during the probability setting value change mode, that is, the RAM initialization switch is started from the time the power is turned on. If 112 is kept pressed, the probability setting value is updated (changed) according to the operation even though the operation is a transition operation.

Specifically, in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process, the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input process is off, and the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input process is in the off state. When the state is on, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on, the input process immediately before the power is turned off is the previous input process, and the input process immediately after the power is turned on is the current input process. The state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the process is likely to be off. That is, if the transition operation continues even during the probability set value change mode, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. ) Is likely to be detected.
Therefore, in this case, if the processing of steps X139 and 140 is performed in the probability setting change / confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the transition operation. There may be a problem that the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such inconvenience, the process of step X138 is performed, and the process of steps X139 and X140 is not performed in the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. I will do it. As a result, regarding the update (change) of the probability set value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has continued since the power was turned on (
That is, since the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode is ignored, it is possible to prevent an unintended update.

From the above, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment is the first game machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result.
A storage means for storing one of a plurality of probability setting values to which the operation unit (setting key operation unit) and the second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) and the probability values used for the lottery of the game are assigned. (Game control device 100 (RAM111C)) and a mode for shifting to a probability setting value change mode in which the probability setting value can be changed in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the power of the game machine is turned on. In response to the operation of the transition means (game control device 100) and the second operation unit in the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value stored in the storage means (value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM). ) Is provided, the operation of the second operation unit for shifting to the probability setting value change mode (shift operation), and the second for changing the probability setting value. The operation (change operation) of the operation unit is the same operation (pressing operation in the case of this embodiment), and the setting changing means continues from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on even in the probability setting value changing mode. It is configured not to respond to the operation of the second operation unit.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit performed when the power of the game machine is turned on continues even after the transition to the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value is not changed during that time, which is not intended. It is possible to prevent the change of the probability set value.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
FIG. 14 shows a start port switch monitoring process (step X1) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process.
11) is shown. In this start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (start winning opening 36)
Prepare a winning monitoring table (step X491) and perform hard random number acquisition processing (step X49).
Do 2). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information on starting opening winning that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on winning the starting winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X49).
3).

If the information with the starting opening winning is not set based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, information on no starting opening prize is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the start opening prize is set based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (normal game state). (Step X494). And when the special figure is low probability & no time reduction (step X49)
4; In Y), the process proceeds to step X497. In addition, if the special figure has a low probability and the time is not shortened (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495).
, Performs the effect command setting process (step X496).

Based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs right-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform a right-handed hit by display, voice, or the like. If you are in a specific game state or a special game state, right-handed is more advantageous for the player, and if you do not hit left, you will not win a prize. When a prize is detected inside, a right-handed instruction is notified.

Then, a table for setting the hold information by the start port 1 is prepared (step X497).
, Special figure start port switch common processing (step X498) is performed. Next, the starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table was prepared (step X499), a hard random number acquisition process (step X500) was performed, and a jackpot random number was acquired based on the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is information on the starting port winning that is set in the case (step X501).

When the information with the start opening prize is not set based on the prize in the normal variable prize device 37 (
In step X501; N), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, information on no starting opening prize is set.
On the other hand, when the information with starting port winning is set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; Y), the normal electric (normal variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, normal. When it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in an open state where winning is possible (step X502), and when the normal electric power is operating (step X502; Y),
The process proceeds to step X504. On the other hand, when the electric power is not operating (step X502; N)
(Step X503).

In the determination of whether or not the fraudulent occurrence of the normal electric power is occurring, it is determined that the fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or fraud has occurred.
If there is a winning game ball in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal winnings.
Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If an illegal operation is occurring (step X503; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more. Further, when the general electric power fraud is not occurring (step X503; N), a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step X504), and the special figure start port switch common process (step X50)
5) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
FIG. 15 shows the special figure start port switch common process (steps X498, X505) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

In this special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is input to the game machine 1.
The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device of 0, is loaded (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step). X523).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is R.
Saved in the start port signal output count area of the WM (step X524), the number of special figure hold (start memory) corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored, that is, the number of special figure hold (start memory) to be updated is the upper limit ( Here, it is determined whether it is less than 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is not saved after the update because the loop is looped by +1 update and becomes 0.

Then, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step X525; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1. (Step X526), the target start opening winning flag is saved (step X527). Next, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared by the hard random number acquisition process is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM. (Step X529).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X5).
30), save in the RWM jackpot symbol random number storage area (step X531). Next, the fall lottery random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and the RWM is prepared.
Save in the fall lottery random number storage area (step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) has won a prize (step X53).
4) If the starting port 2 is not won (step X534; N), the process proceeds to step X537. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X534; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). ..

Then, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step X537), and the special figure reservation information determination processing (step X53), which is a look-ahead process, is performed.
8) is performed. Next, a start port switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step X539), and an effect command setting process (step X540) is prepared.
To end the special figure start port switch common processing.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36, and the predetermined random number can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit as the first starting memory. It serves as a starting memory means. Further, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and the predetermined random number is used as the second random number.
It serves as a second start storage means that can store up to a predetermined upper limit as start memory.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
16 and 17 show a special figure hold information determination process (step X538) in the above-mentioned special figure start port switch common process. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (during the first special gaming state) (step X541), and if the jackpot is in progress (step X541; Y), the special figure reservation information determination is made. End the process. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not hit (step X541; N), the start opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start opening switch common process is checked, and the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) is won. Is determined (step X542).

If the starting port 1 is won (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 to perform look-ahead. On the other hand, if the starting port 1 is not won (step X542; N),
It is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal game state) (step X543). Then, when the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (step X543; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. That is, in the normal gaming state, a long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, but in this case, pre-reading is not performed. On the other hand, when the special figure is low probability & no time reduction is in progress (step X543; N)
), It is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step X544).

If the special figure is not in high probability (step X544; N), the process proceeds to step X548. On the other hand, when the special figure has a high probability (step X544; Y), is the value of the fall lottery random number prepared in step X532 of the special figure start port switch common process within the range of the judgment value of the fall winning? Determine (step X545). Next, the look-ahead fall lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), the effect command setting process (step X547) is performed, and the low probability determination flag is prepared (step X548).

Then, a look-ahead jackpot determination process (step X549) is performed to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit low probability determination value). When the determination result is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step X551), and prepared in step X530 of the special figure start port switch common process. Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number (
Step X552) and step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X550; N), the start port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start port switch common process is checked, and the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). It is determined whether or not the prize is won (step X553).

If the starting port 2 is not won (step X553; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X558), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X553; Y), the small hit determination process (step X554) of determining whether the big hit random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. I do. And
When the determination result is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X556), and step X535 of the special figure start port switch common process is set.
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (step X557), and then
The process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step X555;
In N), the out-of-order stop symbol information is set (step X558), and the stop symbol information acquired in step X552 or X557 or the stop symbol information set in step X558 is saved in the symbol information area (step). X559).

After that, the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information (
(Low probability) is prepared (step X560), and the effect command setting process (step X561)
I do.
Next, a high probability determination flag is prepared (step X562), and a look-ahead jackpot determination process (step X563) is performed to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit high probability determination value). I do. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step X565), and in step X530 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in the above is acquired (step X566), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit (step X564; N)
To check the start port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start port switch common process, it is determined whether or not the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) has won a prize (step X567).

If the starting port 2 is not won (step X567; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X572), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X567; Y), the small hit determination process (step X568) of determining whether the big hit random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. I do. And
When the determination result is a small hit (step X569; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X570), and step X535 of the special figure start port switch common process is set.
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (step X571), and
The process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a small hit (step X569;
In N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step X572), and it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step X573).

Then, when the special figure is not in high probability (step X573; N), the process proceeds to step X575. On the other hand, when the special figure is in high probability (step X573; Y), step X55
The stop symbol information acquired in step X566 or X571 or the stop symbol information set in step X572 is overwritten and saved in the symbol information area in which the stop symbol information is saved in step X576 (step X574). The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is
It is used for look-ahead of fluctuation patterns.

Next, the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information (
Prepare (high probability) (step X575), and direct command setting process (step X576)
I do. As described above, in the present embodiment, each time the special figure reservation information determination process is executed, the result of determination by the jackpot low probability determination value and the result of determination by the jackpot high probability determination value are the effect control device 3
It is sent to 00.
Next, the special figure information setting process (step X577) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process (step X578) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed. I do.
Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X579), and the effect command setting process (step X580) is performed to determine the special figure hold information. End the process. The special figure information setting process in step X577 and the variation pattern setting process in step X578 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, the look-ahead fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and the look-ahead stop including the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target. A symbol command and a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command including information on the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, whether or not the result-related information corresponding to the start memory (whether or not the jackpot probability state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state (normal probability state)) and whether or not the jackpot or small hit is achieved. , The type of variation pattern) determination result (look-ahead result) is set before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.
0 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is notified to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means capable of determining the result of the variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the variation display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage means. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result is obtained). Make a preliminary judgment means. The time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not limited to the start prize when the start memory occurs.
It may be any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
FIG. 18 shows a look-ahead jackpot determination process (step X) in the above-mentioned special figure hold information determination process.
549, X563) was shown. In this look-ahead jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step X581), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step X582). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step X582; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step X587), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for a big hit has been missed.
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step X582; N), it is determined whether the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (step X583). When the judgment flag is a high probability judgment flag (step X583; Y), the upper limit judgment value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X584), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, when the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (step X583; N), that is, when it is the low probability determination flag, the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X585). ), It is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step X587), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586; N), that is, when it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step X588), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 19 shows a special figure 1 game process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above.
showed that. In the special figure 1 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In this special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag that is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted is set (step Y100). In the special figure 1 variable display game, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) and the second special gaming state is executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game. , Is interrupted during the execution of the second special game state.

If the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variation display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y101, and the subsequent special figure 1 variation display is performed. Perform game-related processing. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y101 to Y115 is performed. Instead, the process proceeds to step Y116. As a result, while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

In the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game, first, whether the big hit / small hit of special figure 2 is in progress.
That is, it is determined whether or not the game is in the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit (step Y101). Then, when the big hit / small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y104. On the other hand, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y102) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y103) is performed.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set the large winning opening count command to be sent to the production control device 300 based on the winning to the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when the specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. Is processed. In the special figure 1 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit, and the result of the special figure 2 variable display game. Regarding the special game state executed based on the fact that is a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the game ball is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operating area). Performs the process of setting the area passage flag. Based on the setting of this specific area passage flag, a process for generating a special gaming state is performed.

Next, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y104), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105). And special figure 1
If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y105; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y116. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process is branched to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y106).
Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is acquired (step Y107), and a subroutine call is performed using the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y107).
Step Y108).

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special Figure 1
Setting information necessary to perform processing during fluctuations Special Figure 1 Normal processing (step Y109)
I do.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure 1 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display processing, and the like. 1 Perform the variable processing (step Y110).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2" and the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and each big hit type Set the fanfare time according to the opening pattern of the big prize opening, set the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, etc. Special Figure 1 Displaying processing (
Step Y111) is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Performs fanfare / interval processing (step Y112).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, a process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged, or
Special Figure 1 The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y114) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y115) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109). I do.

After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (
Step Y116), the lever solenoid control process (step Y116) that controls the operation of the lever solenoid 38f by performing the symbol variation control process (step Y117) related to the special figure 1 display 51.
118) is performed to end the special figure 1 game processing. This special figure 1 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control related to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
20 and 21 show a special figure 2 game process (step X113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game processing is basically the same processing as the special figure 1 game processing described above for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in the big hit, that is, in the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being the big hit (step). Y131). Then, when the jackpot in Special Figure 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y)
To step Y134. Also, when the jackpot in Special Figure 1 is not in progress (step Y1
In 31; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y132) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y133) is performed.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set the large winning opening count command to be sent to the production control device 300 based on the winning to the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when the specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. Is processed. In the special figure 2 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the game ball is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operating area). Performs the process of setting the area passage flag. Based on the setting of this specific area passage flag, a process for generating a special gaming state is performed.

Next, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y134), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135). And special figure 2
If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y153. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. Is determined (step Y136).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y136; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y137), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is extended. The fluctuation timer value (for example, 60,000 msec) is saved (step Y138), and the process proceeds to step Y153.
In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal gaming state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the initial value of the timer. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the time is measured for a specified time (for example, 60,000 msec).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y136; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register. Set (step Y139). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is acquired (step Y14).
0), a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y141).

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variation display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the special figure 2 variation display game are set. Figure 2
Special Figure 2 Normal processing (step Y142) to set information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations
I do.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step Y143).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and each big hit type Setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern of the big winning opening, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, etc. Special Figure 2 Displaying processing (
Step Y144) is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y145).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, a process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged, or
Special figure 2 The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y147) for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", special figure 2 jackpot end processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. Processing during small hit fanfare (step Y1) to set the information required for
49).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y150) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. Do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. The small hit remaining ball processing (step Y151) for setting the information necessary for performing the processing is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (
Step Y153), a lever solenoid control process (step Y) that controls the operation of the lever solenoid 38f by performing the symbol variation control process (step Y154) related to the special figure 2 display 52.
155) is performed to end the special figure 2 game processing. This special figure 2 game process performs a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the special figure 1 game processing described above for the special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel in.

[Special figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 22 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start fluctuation (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start the fluctuation is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. In addition, although it is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, in that case, since the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

If the special figure 1 is not capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; N), "0" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y216), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area. (Step Y217), Special Figure 1 The normal processing is completed. Further, when the special figure 1 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202).
If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (step Y202; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and the effect command setting process (step Y20)
4) is performed to set the left-handed instruction notification flag (step Y205). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the specific game state ends, so that the left-handed instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal game state.

Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206), and if the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Further, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and an effect command setting process (step Y2) is prepared.
08) is performed. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) for setting the information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and the decorative special figure 1 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y210). ), The effect command setting process (step Y211) is performed.
At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number subtracted from the number is prepared. After that, the remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step Y212), and the effect command setting process (step Y213) is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y21).
4). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and is 0 to 5.
Is set. Special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special game state which is a special game state based on the jackpot. The special figure status 5 indicates that the game is in the second special game state, which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y215) is performed to end the special figure 1 normal process.

[Special figure 2 Normal processing]
FIG. 23 shows the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y142) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start the fluctuation is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 2 cannot start changing (step Y221; N), "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y238), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. (Step Y239), Special Figure 2 The normal processing is completed. Further, when the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222).

Then, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and the effect command setting process (step Y224) is performed. .. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) for setting the information related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step Y226). ), The effect command setting process (step Y227) is performed. The process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (step Y226).
At the time of performing, the special figure 2 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number -1 from the current special figure 2 hold number. Is preparing. After that, the remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step Y228), and the effect command setting process (step Y229) is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y23).
0). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 as the special figure status
Is set. After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y231) is performed to end the special figure 2 normal process.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step Y222; Y), the special figure 1 hold number is 0.
Is determined (step Y232). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (step Y233). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y234), and when it has not been started (step Y234; N), it is determined.
Performs processing related to setting the customer waiting state. Further, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y).
232; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y233; Y) or when the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y234; Y), the process proceeds to step Y238.

In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demo flag area is set (step Y235), the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236), and the effect is produced. The command setting process (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses the game state information, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate effect. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to produce an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change in the game state is transmitted. You will be able to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the fluctuation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). As a result, the effect control device 30
At 0, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command each time the special figure fluctuation display game starts, even if the effect control device 300 is restarted, the effect according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. This makes it possible to return to the effect according to the game state faster than waiting for the probability information command based on the change in the game state to be transmitted. The customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the effect control device 300 to return to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
FIG. 24A shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y2) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process.
09) was shown. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process is set (step Y241). Then R
WM special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for hold number 1) is loaded with random numbers and prepared (step Y242), and special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (step). Y
243), fall lottery process (step Y24) to draw a lottery for the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state.
4) is performed. The number of hold numbers 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting the missed information or the jackpot information as the result information of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. The symbol setting process (step Y246) is performed. Then, the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y24) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern.
7) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (step Y248).

After that, in the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the game, is set.
The variation pattern setting process (step Y249) is performed, the variation start information setting process (step Y250) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and the time reduction variation number update process (step Y251) is performed. .. Next, "1" related to the special figure 1 changing process is set as the process number (step Y252), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y253).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y254), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y256), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area.
Save the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of (step Y257).
), The initial value (here, “0” indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 1 (step Y258), and the special figure 1 change start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 24B shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y2) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process.
25) is shown. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process is set (step Y261). Then R
WM special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for hold number 1) is loaded with random numbers and prepared (step Y262), and special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (step). Y
263), a fall lottery process for drawing a transition from a high probability state to a low probability state (step Y26).
4) is performed. The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting the missed information, the jackpot information, or the small hit information is performed as the result information of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. Special figure 2 Stop symbol setting process (step Y266) is performed. Then, the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is referred to. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of the above is set, is prepared (step Y268).

After that, in the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the game, is set.
The variation pattern setting process (step Y269) is performed, the variation start information setting process (step Y270) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and the time reduction variation start update process (step Y271) is performed. .. Next, "1" related to the special figure 2 changing process is set as the process number (step Y272), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y273).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y274), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 2 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y276), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area.
Save the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer (step Y277).
), The initial value (here, "0" indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 2 (step Y278), and the special figure 2 change start process is terminated.

In addition, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value, such as selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the probability set value or making the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern different according to the probability set value.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 25 shows a fall lottery process (steps Y244 and Y264) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 change start process. In this fall lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (step Y581), and if it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y581; N), the fall lottery process ends. In addition, when the special figure is in high probability (step Y581; Y)
Is determined whether the value of the target fall lottery random number is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582).
). Winning the fall lottery means that the fall lottery random number matches the fall lottery determination value. The fall lottery judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the fall lottery random number is equal to or higher than the fall lottery lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the fall lottery judgment value and is the upper limit value of the fall lottery judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, it is determined that the fall lottery has been won.

If the value of the fall lottery random number is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; Y), that is, if the fall lottery is not won, the fall lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the fall lottery random number is not less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; N), it is determined whether the value of the target fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583).
If the value of the fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583; Y), that is, if the fall lottery is not won, the fall lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the fall lottery random number is not larger than the fall lottery upper limit judgment value (
Step X583; N), that is, when the fall lottery is won, the process for shifting to the low probability state is performed.

In the process for shifting to the low probability state, first, the signal relating to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON, and the jackpot 4 signal is set to OFF. Next, the signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is O.
FF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal OFF,
Special symbol 2 Set the fluctuation time shortening status signal to OFF.
Then, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y5).
86), save the number without time reduction in the game status display number area (step Y587). After that, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and the fall lottery process is completed. As a result, the state becomes a low probability state and there is no general electric support, and the state shifts to the normal game state. Information on the end of the high-probability state and the end of the Fuden support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 3
In 00, processing such as changing the effect mode is performed based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 26A shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step Y282), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (for the number of hold 1). Step Y283).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y284), and when it is a jackpot (step Y284; Y).
Ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits. If it is not a big hit (step Y284; N), a big hit determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is a jackpot (step Y286; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step Y281 (step). Y287), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (step Y285) is not a big hit (
In step Y286; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. In this case, the loss information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 26B shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, RWM's special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for 1 hold number)
Load and prepare the jackpot random number from (step Y293), and special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (step Y293).
Clear 0 (for 1 hold number) (step Y294).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y295), and when it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y).
To step Y299. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.
Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step Y292 (step). Y298), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed.

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), it is determined whether the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. Save (step Y301) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (
In step Y300; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 27 shows the jackpot determination process (steps Y285, Y296) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot judgment process, first
The lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process ends. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for a big hit has been missed. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N).
), It is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step Y313).

Then, when the special figure is in high probability (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y314), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step Y316). Further, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step Y313; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y315), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit judgment. Determine if it is greater than the value (
Step Y316).

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y31).
6; N), that is, in the case of a big hit, a big hit is set as a judgment result (step Y).
318), the jackpot determination process is completed.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 28 shows a small hit determination process (step Y29) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 2 setting process.
9) was shown. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target large hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). In addition, the small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or more than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Moreover, the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value do not overlap.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. When the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y321;
Step Y322).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process is terminated. Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322; N), that is, when it is a small hit, a small hit is set as a determination result (step Y324), and the small hit determination process is performed. finish.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 29 shows a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
246) was shown. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1
Load the jackpot symbol random number from the jackpot symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) (step Y3)
32). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y333).
Step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y335).
Step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure display (here, special figure 1 display 51).
This is for setting the stop symbol at the display device 41 and the stop symbol at the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the number of special figure 1 rounds. Save in the upper limit information area (step Y338), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special drawing 1 large winning opening opening information area (step Y339), and move to step Y340. .. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the missed stop symbol pattern is set in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Next, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y340). As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y341) is performed. As a result, the decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343), and the special figure 1 Stop The symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 30 shows a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
266) was shown. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step Y361), and when it is a jackpot (step Y3).
In 61; Y), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y362). Next, set the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table (step Y).
363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process.
It should be noted that the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y365).
Step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure display (here, special figure 2 display 52).
This is for setting the stop symbol at the display device 41 and the stop symbol at the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the number of special figure 2 rounds. Save in the upper limit information area (step Y368), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special drawing 2 large winning opening opening information area (step Y369), and proceed to step Y370. .. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and if it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number. Load the small hit symbol random number from the storage area (for 1 hold number) (step Y37)
6). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y377), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y378). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y).
379), the process proceeds to step Y370.

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y380), and the miss stop symbol pattern is set as a special figure. 2 Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Next, the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y370). As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y371) is performed. As a result, the decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372).
, Special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y373), special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y374), special figure 2 FIG. 2 The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

By the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
Based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means, the game control device 100 starts the first variation display game by transmitting the result and the variation mode information of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). It is the first decision-making tool that can be decided before. In addition, the game control device 100
Based on the second start memory stored in the second start storage means, the result of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) and the variation mode information can be determined before the start of the second variation display game. Make a possible second decision. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

From the above, the start winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win, and the normal variable winning device 37 is the game ball fired on the other side of the game area 32. Is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and the second determination is made in the normal state (normal game state). The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the means is longer than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. Become.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorative special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information about patterns. By transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a first variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game processing.
Further, the game control device 100 serves as a second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the fluctuation time for each of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game according to the start of the fluctuation display game, and the measurement time elapses. It serves as a measurement means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

In the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, a long variation with a very long variation time is set, but in this case, the information about the variation time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the variation is long. You may want to send a command that only indicates that. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply perform the fluctuation display, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command of long variation.
The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the fluctuation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the variation display based on receiving the stop command. To do so. By doing so, the effect control device 300
It is possible to reduce the burden of control in.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 31 shows a special figure 1 information setting process (step Y24) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
7) was shown. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), and the first half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern,
Acquire the second half offset data (step Y402), and special figure 1 big hit, that is, special figure 1
It is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot stop symbol pattern (step Y403).
In the case of a special figure 1 big hit (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

If it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y403; N), the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 hold number to the first half offset data (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y405).
), End the special figure 1 information setting process. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.
In this way, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of special figure 1 hold only in the case of the first half change pattern, and in the case of a big hit, the number of special figure 1 hold is taken into consideration. The fluctuation pattern is determined without.

[Special figure 2 information setting process]
FIG. 32 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y26) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
7) was shown. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal game state) (step Y421). Special figure Low probability & No time saving When not in (
In step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not the time is the final variation (step Y427).
.. Here, the special figure 2 variable display game to be started from now on is 100 from the end of the special game state.
In the case of the special figure fluctuation display game of the number of times (support count), it is determined that the time is shortened and the final fluctuation is performed.

Then, in the case of the time reduction final variation (step Y427; Y), step Y42
Move to 8. If it is not the time-reduced final variation (step Y427; N), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired. (Step Y424),
The process proceeds to step Y425.

On the other hand, when the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether the final variation has a high probability (step Y427). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability.
Then, in the case of a high probability final fluctuation (step Y427; Y), the first half offset data and the second half offset data for the final fluctuation are set (step Y428), and step Y
Move to 425.
If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y427; N), it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 2 jackpot (step Y429). And when it is not a special figure 2 big hit (step Y42)
In 9; N), the first half offset data for the low probability special figure 2 miss / small hit is set (step Y430), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set (step Y432).
), The process proceeds to step Y425.

Further, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y431), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. (Step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y426).
), End the special figure 2 information setting process. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.
As described above, in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the number of special figure 2 reserved.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 33 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y249) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step Y451), and the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holds 1) of FIG. 1 (step Y453).
Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y454), and when the special figure 1 is off (step Y454; Y), 2
Byte distribution processing (step Y455) is performed. If the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), the sorting process (step Y456) is performed.

In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the hit type and the missed type. Specifically, the hit size is 1 byte size, and the loss size is 2 byte size. Since the hit rate is lower than the loss rate and even one byte is sufficient, the hit size is 1 byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to enable a wider variety of effects, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1. And prepare (step Y458). Next, the distribution process (step Y459) is performed, and the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (step Y460). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (
Step Y463), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 1 (step Y464).
After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y466), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step Y471), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holds 1) in FIG. 2 (step Y).
473).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y474), and when the special figure 2 is off (step Y474; Y), 2
Byte distribution processing (step Y475) is performed. Further, if the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y474; N), the sorting process (step Y476) is performed.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 2. And prepare (step Y478). Next, the distribution process (step Y479) is performed, and the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (step Y480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (
Step Y483), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 2 (step Y484).
After that, the distribution process (step Y485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y486), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is set.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 35 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y250, Y270) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y551). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y552), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y553). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y554), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y555). Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step Y556), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y5).
57).

In the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, the above added value is the specified time (here, 60,000 m).
The remaining time (seconds) excluding the time that can be timed using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times that time is performed
(Time less than 60,000 msec) is calculated as an additional value.

After that, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558), and if the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y558; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether or not the long variation of the special figure 2 has started (step Y559). The long variation is a variation pattern set in the normal gaming state of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

Then, when it is not the start of the long variation of special figure 2 (step Y559; N), 0 is set to special figure 2.
Save in the repeat count area of the game processing timer (step Y560). In addition, special figure 2
In the case of the start of the long fluctuation of (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repeat count region of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

After that, a variable command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variable number is prepared (step Y562).
, The variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the latter half variation number is prepared (step Y563), and the effect command setting process (step Y564) is performed. Next, the number of pending targets is updated by -1 (step Y566), the contents of the target random number storage area are shifted (step Y566), the free area after the shift is cleared (step Y567), and the fluctuation start information is set. End the process.

In the present embodiment, the number of repetitions is set for the long variation of FIG. 2 in order to vary the time that is insufficient for the 2-byte timer. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the addition result is 600.
The timer for 00msec, the number of repetitions of 9 is saved, the timer is subtracted by the timer interrupt processing, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 and the game processing timer is 60000m.
Set the seconds. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation in Special Figure 2 is 10 minutes (= 60,000 ms x).
10). Since the timer interrupt cycle is 4 msec, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, it can be expressed by multiplying by 60 seconds.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update processing]
FIG. 36 shows the time reduction variation number update processing (steps Y251 and Y271) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this time reduction fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (in a high probability state) (step Y571), and if the special figure has a high probability (step Y571; Y), the time The shortened fluctuation count update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure is not in high probability (step Y571; N), it is determined whether the special figure time is shortened (step Y572). Then, when the special time is not shortened (step Y572; N).
) Ends the time reduction variation number update process. Further, when the special figure time reduction is in progress (step Y572; Y), the time reduction variation number is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the time reduction variation number is "0" (step Y574). ..

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A754; N), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated. Further, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step Y57).
In 4; Y), a signal relating to the end of the time saving state (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575), and a signal relating to the end of the time saving state (for example, the signal indicating the end of the time saving state) is saved.
Special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal is turned off,
Normal symbol 1 Fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned off)
Is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y577), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578).
), Save the normal map time saving flag in the normal map game mode flag area (step Y579)
), Ends the time reduction fluctuation count update process.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above.
showed that. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y621). Then, load the command from the decoration special figure 1 command area and prepare (
Step Y622) and the effect command setting process (step Y623) are performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and the effect command setting process (step Y625) is performed. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game machine may be forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, when the fluctuation is stopped, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. .. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In the present embodiment, for example, 600 in the case of disconnection.
A display time of m seconds, or 2000 msec in the case of a big hit, is set.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special drawing 1 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y627). If it is out of the special figure 1 (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y642. In addition, when the special figure 1 is not out of place (step Y627;
N), that is, if it is a big hit, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). It should be noted that whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y639. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is being performed (step Y629). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit, the special figure 2 being executed
This is a case where the variable display game is forcibly stopped due to a loss result. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of special figure 2 is in progress (step Y639; Y), the process proceeds to step Y631. Further, when the special figure 2 is not being processed during display (step Y629; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y630), and the special figure 1 is set as the display time of the special figure 2. Display time + display time of 4 msec is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even if the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. This resetting extends the stop display time, but may shorten it in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decorative special figure 2 off-design command is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and the effect command setting process (step Y635) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y636), the effect command setting process (step Y638) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y638) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y639), and the information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area. (Step Y640), the information is loaded from the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y641). After that, information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y643) is performed to perform the special figure 1
Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y143) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
showed that. In this special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y651). Then, load the command from the decoration special figure 2 command area and prepare (
Step Y652) and the effect command setting process (step Y653) are performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and the effect command setting process (step Y655) is performed. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In the present embodiment, for example, a display time of 600 msec is set in the case of a miss, 600 ms in the case of a big hit, and 136 ms in the case of a small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special drawing 2 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y657). If it is out of the special figure 2 (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. In addition, when the special figure 2 is not off (step Y657;
N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the process proceeds to step Y673. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). Special figure 2 When it is not a big hit (step Y65)
9; N), that is, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the decorative special figure 1 interruption command is prepared (step Y671). ), Perform the effect command setting process (step Y672), and step Y673.
Move to.

That is, in this case, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit. Note that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, in the case of a special figure 2 big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display is being processed (step Y660). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. Note that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of special figure 1 is in progress (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. Further, when the special figure 1 is not being processed during display (step Y660; N), the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the display time of the special figure 1 is set as the display time of the special figure 2. Display time + display time of 4 msec is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of the special figure 2 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 1, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even if the special figure 1 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. This resetting extends the stop display time, but may shorten it in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 off-design command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and the effect command setting process (step Y666) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), the effect command setting process (step Y668) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and whether the special figure 2 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Determine (step Y674). In the case of a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (
Step Y674; N), that is, in the case of a big hit, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y675).
Special figure 2 Load information from the large winning opening opening information area and save it in the large winning opening opening information area (
Step Y676). After that, information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678) is performed to perform the special figure 2 stop symbol area. Ends the process being displayed.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
In FIG. 39, the process during display of the special figure 1 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process (step Y111).
showed that. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y7).
51), the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (step Y752). Then, the special figure 1 determines whether it is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y753).
, When the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, a special symbol) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variation display game is turned on. (1 signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754).
..

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y755), and the effect command setting process (step Y756) is performed.
I do. After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and the effect command setting process (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of this embodiment
Two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information
Is set (step Y760), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y762), and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y763). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y764) is performed to perform the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing.
Special Figure 1 Displaying Processing ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, the big hit flag 1
If it is out-of-order information, it is determined whether it is a high-probability final variation (step Y765), and if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y765; N), it is determined whether it is a time-reduced final variation (step Y766). .. Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined that the time reduction final variation.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y765; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y765; Y) or a time reduction final variation (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and an effect command is provided. The setting process (step Y768) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y769), the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y770), and the small hit in Special Figure 2 is in progress, that is, Special Figure 2 It is determined whether or not a special gaming state is executed based on the result of the variable display game being a small hit (step Y771).

If the small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y771; Y), the process proceeds to step Y774. On the other hand, when the small hit in FIG. 2 is not in progress (step Y771; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y773). As a result, the first game status display unit 5
6 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed is displayed. After that, the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y774), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775), and the special figure 1 is Ends the process being displayed.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
40 and 41 show the process during display of the special figure 2 (step Y144) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In addition, the special figure 2 display process is the same process as the special figure 1 display process described above for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is loaded. Clear two areas (step Y812).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 region is loaded (step Y813) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, and the jackpot flag 2 region is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is the big hit information (step Y815), and when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variation display game. The test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned ON and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned ON) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y817), and the effect command setting process (step Y818) is performed.
I do. After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and the effect command setting process (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of this embodiment
Two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information
Is set (step Y822), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y824), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y825). Further, the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing (step Y826) is performed.
Special Figure 2 Displaying Processing ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, the big hit flag 2
If the information is out of order, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y8).
In 27; Y), it is determined whether it is a high-probability final variation (step Y828), and when it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y828; N), it is determined whether it is a time-reduced final variation (step Y829). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (support count) from the end of the special game state, it is determined that the time is shortened and the final variation is achieved.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y828; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y829; N), the process proceeds to step Y834. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y828; Y) or a time reduction final variation (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and an effect command is provided. The setting process (step Y831) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y832), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the player is not aware of the occurrence of the small hit. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, load and prepare a command from the hit symbol command area (step Y834), and prepare.
The effect command setting process (step Y835) is performed. Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), an effect command setting process (step Y837) is performed, and a signal related to a right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838).
). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing a right-handed strike is made.
After that, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the lower prize opening is cleared (step Y840), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the area of the flag area of the illegal monitoring period of the lower winning opening (step Y841), and special figure 2
The small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y857) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is terminated.

Further, when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843), and when it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y84).
In 3; N), it is determined whether or not the time is the final variation (step Y844). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. In addition, the running special figure 2 variable display game has been played 100 times since the end of the special game state (
In the case of the special figure fluctuation display game of the eye), it is determined that the time is shortened and the final fluctuation is made.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y843; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y843; Y) or a time reduction final variation (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and an effect command is provided. The setting process (step Y846) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y847), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a left-handed strike instruction is displayed. After that, the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y850), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851), and the special figure 2 is Ends the process being displayed.

That is, the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device based on the first special result of the variable display game. A second special game generating means for generating a second special gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened without operating the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has achieved the second special result. Eggplant.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
42 and 43 show fanfare / interval processing (steps Y112, Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941), and if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y941; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941; Y), it is determined whether it is the first round (step Y942).

If it is not the first round (step Y942; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, in the case of the first round (step Y942; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943). Here, in the present embodiment, the special game state is started by the game ball passing through the normal figure start gate 34 after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure variation display game. There is.

If the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943; Y), the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y944), and the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is set. The value (10 in the case of the present embodiment) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y945). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

Next, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the upper prize opening is cleared (step Y947), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the area of the flag area of the illegal monitoring period of the upper winning opening (step Y948). After that, the on-output data of the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y950).
.. Then, a round command corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y951), and the effect command setting process (step Y952) is performed.

Next, the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y954), and the jackpot prize is won. The large winning opening time corresponding to the opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y955). The initial value of the processing control pointer during the jackpot is set to 0 when opening and closing are repeated in one round. In this embodiment, a long opening with V corresponds. In addition, when opening once in one round, the jackpot operation end value (
In the case of this embodiment, 2) is set. The initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

Next, it is determined whether the lever solenoid operation round is reached (step Y956). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only a specific round of the first round. Then, in the case of the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N),
The stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

After that, 4 is set as the processing number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y960). And when it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y960;
In Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y961), and the large winning opening opening time is saved in the special drawing 1 game processing timer area (step Y962). on the other hand,
If it is not the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y960; N), that is, if it is the big hit of special figure 2, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y963), and the big winning opening opening time is set. Special figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (step Y964).

Then, the signal related to the opening start of the upper prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (
Step Y965). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is set to ON. Next, the first
In order to open the opening / closing member of the special variable winning device 38, the upper winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y966), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. Is cleared (step Y967), and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the special gaming state based on the jackpot (first special gaming state), only the upper prize opening (first special variable device 38) is open and small. In the special game state based on the hit (second special game state), only the lower grand prize opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing mode in the first special game state may be such that the upper prize opening is open in the first round and the lower prize opening is open in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y11) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
5) is shown. In this special figure 1 jackpot end process, first, a subroutine call based on the time reduction determination data is performed (step Y1101). If the time reduction determination data has no time reduction in step Y1101, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step Y1102) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has time reduction in step Y1101, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1102) is performed. Step Y1103) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1104). In the present embodiment, when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area), the specific area passage flag is set.
When this specific area passage flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passage information. If there is no specific area passage information (step Y1104; N), the process proceeds to step Y1106. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1104; Y), the jackpot end setting process 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1106), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variation operation area) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the passage is irregular in the specific region, which is the inflow of the (step Y1107).

If the passage is not irregular in the specific region (step Y1107; N), step Y1
Move to 109. On the other hand, when the passage is irregular in a specific region (step Y1107;
In Y), add irregular probability variation information to the probability information command (step Y1108).
), The effect command setting process (step Y1109) is performed. By the process of step Y1109, the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands in which the production mode information is included in any of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "low probability / no time saving". Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the probability variation operation area, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" related to the special figure 1 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1110), and the processing number is set.
The processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1111). Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112).
Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). here,
Condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special symbol 1 hit signal and special symbol 2
Set the hit signal to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114).
Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (step Y1)
115), clear the special figure status area (step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. And special figure 2 game weight time value (
For example, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is completed.

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 jackpot end process is used to start the special figure variation display game in the special figure 2 game processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variation display game. Can be started earlier. Therefore, in step Y1117, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area.
The start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, the second variable display game execution control means is the first until the game control device 100 can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. 2 Variable display A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the game from being executed.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 2 jackpot end process (step Y14) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
8) was shown. The special figure 2 big hit end process is the step Y110 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit process.
The process is the same except that 9 is not performed. In this special figure 2 big hit end process, first, a subroutine call is performed based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1131). Step Y113
If there is no time reduction in the time reduction determination data in 1, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step Y1)
132) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has a time reduction in step Y1131, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1133) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1134), and if there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1134; Y), the jackpot end setting process 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variation operation area) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the passage is irregular in the specific region, which is the inflow of the (step Y1137).

If the passage is not irregular in a specific area (step Y1137; N), step Y1
Move to 139. On the other hand, when the passage is irregular in a specific area (step Y1137;
In Y), add irregular probability variation information to the probability information command (step Y1138).
), The effect command setting process (step Y1139) is performed. By the process of step Y1139, the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands in which the production mode information is included in any of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "low probability / no time saving". Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the probability variation operation area, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" related to the special figure 2 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1140).
The processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1141). Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143).
Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). here,
Condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special symbol 1 hit signal and special symbol 2
Set the hit signal to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144), and the light is turned off.
Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (step Y11)
45), the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1146), and the special figure 2 jackpot end process is completed. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 46A shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1102, 1132) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, the signal relating to the start without shortening the time is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to OFF. At this point, only the data is set and no output is made.

Next, the signal relating to the start without time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and ordinary electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to OFF.
After that, the number without time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step Y1153), and
Save the normal time saving flag in the normal figure game mode flag area (step Y1154).
.. Next, the special figure low probability and no time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and the time reduction fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time reduction state is set to 0. Clear (step Y1156).

Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1).
157). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a left-handed strike instruction is displayed. After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area when the power is restored (step Y1159), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated. By this process, it becomes a normal game state.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 46 (b) shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1103, 1133) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal related to the start of the time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1).
161). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal relating to the start with a short time is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and ordinary electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to ON.
After that, the number with the time saving is saved in the game status display number area (step Y1163), and
Save the flag with a short time in the normal map game mode flag area (step Y1164)
.. Next, the special figure low probability and time saving flags are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and the initial time saving fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the time saving state is initially set. Save the value (step Y1166). In the case of this embodiment, since the number of times of support is 100, 100 is saved as an initial value in step Y1166.

Then, the probability information command (time reduction) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1167), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By this processing, it becomes the second specific game state with a low probability of special figure. In the case of this embodiment, the right-handed mode is used during the time saving state.
Since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
FIG. 47 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (steps Y1105 and Y1135) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 3, first, the signal related to the start of the special figure time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1).
171). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, save the signal related to the start with high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (
Step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON. After that, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step Y1173).
), Save the special figure high probability and time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1).
175). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the game status display number 2
The number in the right-handed state is saved in the area (step Y1176). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing a right-handed strike is made. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1177), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is terminated. By this processing, a high probability state is obtained. That is, by executing the jackpot end setting process 3 after the jackpot end setting process 1, the first specific game state is established.
By executing the jackpot end setting process 3 after the jackpot end setting process 2, the second with a high probability of special figure
It becomes a specific game state.
By the above processing, it is possible to set a specific gaming state which is a high probability state after the end of the first special gaming state. That is, the game control device 100 has a specific game state (first specific game state ST2, special figure high probability second specific game state ST3) in which the probability that the result of the special variation display game becomes a special result is higher than the normal state. Is a means for generating a specific game state that can generate.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
FIG. 48 shows the small hit fanfare middle process (step Y149) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this small hit fanfare middle process, first, a small hit opening command for opening the lower prize opening is prepared (step Y1201), and an effect command setting process (step Y1202) is performed. Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1203), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1204).
).

Next, the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation (turn on the special electric accessory 2 operating signal) is a test signal. Save to the output data area (step Y1206). And
Save the lower prize opening on-data in the grand prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y12)
07), the large winning opening count area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1208), and the processing during the small hit fanfare is completed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y15) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
2) was shown. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1335). Step Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area
The special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal game state) (step Y133).
7) In the case of low probability of special figure & no time reduction (step Y1337; N), step Y
Move to 1340. In addition, when the special figure has a low probability and there is no time reduction (step Y1337;
In Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1338). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1340).

Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N),
The special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is completed. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1340; Y).
), The decoration special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1341), and the effect command setting process (step Y1342) is performed. After that, clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area (
Step Y1343), special figure 2 small hit end processing is completed. As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device 100 is the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 1).
When the execution control of one of the variable display game execution control means is performed by the variable display game execution control means of either 00) or the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100).
When the other variable display game whose execution is controlled by the other variable display game execution control means has a special result, one variable display game is interrupted and the special gaming state based on the other variable display game is changed. It serves as a restart control means capable of executing restart control for restarting one of the variable display games that was interrupted after the game was finished.

Here, an example of the data structure of ROM 111B is shown in FIG.
The ROM 111B provided in the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is shown in FIG. 50 (
As shown in a), the program / data area where the program and fixed data are stored, the ROM comment area where arbitrary data such as the title and version of the program can be set, and the start address and timer allocation of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction. It has a vector table area in which a table for setting the start address of interrupt processing is stored, and an HW (hardware) parameter area in which parameters for setting the internal functions of the gaming microcomputer 111 in terms of hardware are stored. ing.

In the program / data area, as shown in FIG. 50A, a program area 111Ba in which various programs are stored, a first unused area 111Bb, and a data area 111Bc in which various fixed data are stored are stored in this order from the beginning. And a second unused area 111Bd are provided. Then, when the CPU 111A accesses the second unused area 111Bd, an illegal access reset is configured to occur.

As shown in FIG. 50B, the data area 111Bc stores the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table in which the upper limit judgment value table used for the jackpot judgment is stored, and the performance display in which the data related to the performance display is stored. Areas for various data such as area A3 are provided. Further, an unused area A2 for which access is prohibited is provided between the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table and the area A3 for displaying the performance in the data area 111Bc. And C
When the PU111A accesses the unused area A2, an illegal access reset is configured to occur.

The CPU 111A sets the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value in step X585 of the look-ahead jackpot determination process (FIG. 18) and step Y315 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 27). At that time, using the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM as a pointer, R
The upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is acquired from OM111B and set.
Further, the CPU 111A sets an upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value in step X584 of the look-ahead jackpot determination process (FIG. 18) and step Y314 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 27). At that time, using the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM as a pointer, the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is acquired from the ROM 111B and set.

In the look-ahead jackpot determination process and the jackpot determination process, the process of determining whether the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (range of 0 to 5 in this embodiment) is not performed. for that reason,
Even when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, the data is acquired from the ROM 111B using the value (outlier value) as a pointer. Therefore, for example, FIG.
As shown in 1, when the unused area A2 is not arranged immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table, that is, the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table and the area A3 for displaying the performance are adjacent to each other. If this is the case, an accurate jackpot determination cannot be made, and there may be inconveniences such as a significant jackpot easily or a significantly difficult jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51, when the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table and the area A3 for performance display are adjacent to each other, and the upper limit judgment value in low probability is acquired from the ROM 111B. In addition, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "5" (within the normal range), the upper limit determination corresponding to "setting 6" in the low probability is made by using the value as a pointer. Values, that is, accurate data can be obtained. On the other hand, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "7".
When it is (outside the normal range), the data stored in the performance display area A3, that is, erroneous data is acquired by using the value as a pointer. The same applies to the case of acquiring the upper limit determination value in high probability from ROM 111B.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the area A for the upper limit determination value table
The unused area A2 was placed immediately after 1. As a result, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, if an attempt is made to acquire the upper limit determination value from the ROM 111B using the value as a pointer, the unused area (access prohibited area) A2 is displayed. Since it will be accessed, an illegal access reset will occur. As a result, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM can be initialized, and an abnormality can be notified.

Specifically, when an illegal access reset occurs, the program is restarted and the main processing (FIGS. 9 and 10) is started. At that time, since the processing when a power failure occurs (steps X55 to X61) is not executed before the restart, the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is not the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 in the main processing after the restart. Is determined (step X)
16; N). At that time, when restarting, the setting change operation (setting key switch 152 and R)
Since the operation of the AM initialization switch 112) is not performed, it is determined that both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the off state in the main process after the restart (step X21; N). Therefore, since the processes of steps X25 and X26 are executed, the setting change operation is required, that is, an abnormality is notified. Then, by this request (notification), the power of the game machine is turned on again while executing the setting change operation, so that the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is initialized ( Step X28).

As shown in FIG. 50 (c), the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table is the data area 1.
It may be placed at the end of 11Bc. In this case, even if the unused area A2 is not placed immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table, an illegal access reset occurs when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range. To do. That is, when the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table is arranged at the end of the data area 111Bc, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, the value is used as a pointer to the upper limit from the ROM 111B. If the determination value is to be acquired, the second unused area (access prohibited area) 111Bd will be accessed, so that an illegal access reset will occur.

From the above, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment has a control means (game control device 100 (CPU111A)) for controlling the game and a storage means (game) in which information necessary for controlling the game by the control means is stored. A control device 100 (ROM111B)) is provided, and among a plurality of storage areas included in the storage means, each storage area included in the area for the probability value table (area A1 for the upper limit determination value table) is the storage area. The probability value assigned to the probability setting value corresponding to is stored, and the control means stores the probability setting value (the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM) stored in the storage means among the plurality of storage areas. Information (data) is acquired from the corresponding storage area, a game lottery (big hit judgment) is performed using the information, and the storage means does not store the information continuously in the area for the probability value table. Used area (unused area A2, second unused area 11)
1Bd) is configured to be arranged (see FIGS. 50 (b) and 50 (c)).
With this configuration, when the probability setting value (value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM) stored in the storage means is out of the normal range, the unused area (unused area A2, The second unused area 111Bd) will be accessed. That is, since the lottery itself is not executed when an accurate lottery result cannot be obtained, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as being extremely easy to win the lottery or being extremely difficult to win the lottery.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 52 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 52, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the CPU is initially set (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are enabled (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C).
5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure detection detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal, and the LED by the player
The hall / player setting mode processing that accepts operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the liquid crystal and the liquid crystal is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, the reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes the command from the game control device 100 and responds to it is performed, and the effect display editing process (step C13) that edits the setting and drawing command for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, a V blank interrupt (1/6) is used to create a system cycle (1/30 second per frame).
When 0 seconds) is entered twice, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached. The frame switching timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process that controls LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 (step). C18), a panel that performs a movable body control process (step C19) that controls the motor, solenoid, and reel 6 of the panel effect device 44, and controls the effect by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, and the like. The effect setting process (step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 53 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (
Step C201), it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (step C202).
.. Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Then, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
), The command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer.
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
Can be moved to make space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one main process.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 54 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
To determine if the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C23).
4).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in the step C234 that the ACT for the MODE is not the correct combination (step C232; N, step C233; N). C2
At 34; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (
In step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of variable commands (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235).
In Y), a variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C235, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
In step C235; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). And MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C237, when it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for commanding information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command processing (step C239; Y)
Step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol commands (
In step C239; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of single-shot commands such as the hold number command and the error command (step C241). Single-shot commands are commands that are established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. This single-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, and a model specification command. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C24).
In 1; Y), a single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command (
In step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol command processing (step C2) is performed.
44) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N)
Ends the received command analysis process.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41. It is a production such as performing a production display on. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance of the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 when the start prize is won. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 55 shows variable command processing (step C2) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing.
36) was shown. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-mentioned symbol system command processing.

When this special figure type is undetermined (step C361; Y), the variable command processing ends. If the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C361; N).
Step C362), it is determined whether the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C362).
363).

If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variable command process ends. If the variable command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C3).
63; N) determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol type includes, for example, a missed symbol, a 10R probability variation big hit symbol, a 4R probability variation jackpot symbol, a 10R normal jackpot symbol, and a small hit symbol. When the fluctuation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, it is possible to perform an effect such as when the deviation command (variation pattern command) is received but the symbol command of the 10R probability variation jackpot symbol is received. It means that the combination is inconsistent (combination of variable command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, the variation effect setting process for setting the information for performing the effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366).
). Here, the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (number of times of pre-reading execution) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command processing is terminated.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 56 shows a jackpot command process (step C) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process.
238) was shown. In this jackpot command process, first, MODE determines whether or not it is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). Then, when the MODE is a fanfare (step C401; Y), a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare display image according to a big hit type and a small hit is performed (step C402), and the P machine state is set during the fanfare. The setting (step C403) is performed, and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state. Then, when the MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the number of rounds display information is performed (step C405), and the P machine state is set during the round (step C406). End the jackpot command processing.

If the MODE is not a round (step C404; N), the MODE determines if it is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to the interval between rounds. When the MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), the interval effect setting process for setting the effect during the interval is performed (step C408), the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409), and the jackpot is hit. Terminate system command processing. If the MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to the ending after the end of the final round or a small hit end screen command at the end of the small hit.

When MODE is the ending (step C410; Y), the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect at the end of the big hit or the small hit is performed (step C4).
11), the P machine state is set during the ending (step C412), and the jackpot command processing is completed. If MODE is not the ending (step C410; N),
MODE determines whether it is a count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a large winning opening count command based on winning a prize in the special variable winning device.

If MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the jackpot command process ends. When the MODE is a count (step C413; Y), the count effect setting process (step C414) for setting the effect corresponding to the winning of the special variable winning device 38 is performed, and the jackpot command process is completed.

<Operation promotion production>
The effect control device 300 can execute an operation promotion effect that urges the player to operate the operation means (effect button 25, touch panel 29).
In the operation promotion effect (button operation promotion effect) that prompts the operation of the effect button 25, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the effect button image G11 imitating the effect button 25 and the remaining length of the operation valid period are displayed. Notification image G12 (for example, time bar image) to be notified and effect button 25
The button operation promotion image G1 including the instruction image G13 (for example, a character image such as "press!" Or "three consecutive hits!") Instructing the operation mode (including the number of operations) is displayed on the display device 41.

Further, in the operation promotion effect (touch operation promotion effect) for prompting the operation of the touch panel 29, for example, as shown in FIG. 57B, the touch panel image G21 imitating the touch panel 29
A notification image G22 (for example, a time bar image) that notifies the remaining length of the operation valid period, and an instruction image G23 (for example, "draw a circle!") Or "draw a circle!" Touch operation promotion image G2 including text images such as "touch the shining part!"
Is displayed on the display device 41.
In this embodiment, since the touch panel 29 is integrally provided with the effect button 25, the effect button image G11 and the touch panel image G21 are the same image. Of course
When the touch panel 29 is separate from the effect button 25, the effect button image G11 and the touch panel image G21 are different images.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the operation promotion effect (button operation promotion effect) for prompting the operation of the effect button 25, for example, FIG. 57 (c) is used instead of the normal size effect button image G11 (see FIG. 57 (a)). ), The effect button image G11 having a size larger than the normal size may be displayed.
Hereinafter, the button operation promotion effect in which the normal size effect button image G11 is displayed is referred to as "normal button operation promotion effect", and the button operation promotion effect in which the effect button image G11 larger than the normal size is displayed is "specified". It is called "button operation promotion effect".

The effect control device 300 is, for example, a variable effect setting process (FIG. 55) for variable command processing (FIG. 55).
In step C365), the operation promotion effect setting process for setting the information for performing the operation promotion effect is executed. An example of the operation promotion effect setting process is shown in FIG. 58 (a).
In this operation promotion effect setting process, first, based on the variation command from the game control device 100, it is determined whether to execute the operation promotion effect in the special figure variation display game to be executed this time (step C501). Then, when the operation promotion effect is not executed in the special figure variation display game to be executed this time (step C501; N), the operation promotion effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the operation promotion effect is executed in the special figure variation display game to be executed this time (step C5).
01; Y), that is, when the variation command from the game control device 100 is a variation command including information on the variation pattern for executing the operation promotion effect, the operation promotion corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time. The production distribution table is set (step C502).
Specifically, the effect control device 300 determines, for example, that the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is other than a big hit (that is, a miss or a small hit) based on a symbol command from the game control device 100. In that case, the operation promotion effect distribution table (for example, FIG. 58 (b)) for other than the big hit is set, and when it is determined that the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is the big hit, the big hit An operation promotion effect distribution table (for example, FIG. 58 (c)) is set.

Next, the type of operation promotion effect to be executed is determined with reference to the set operation promotion effect distribution table (step C503). In step C503, in addition to the type of operation promotion effect to be executed, the operation mode (including the number of operations) and the like are determined by lottery or the like. That is, for example, when the type of operation promotion effect to be executed is a normal button operation promotion effect, it is determined whether the operation mode is short-pressed or long-pressed, and in the case of short-pressed, the number of operations (continuous hits). Decide how many times to set).

Then, the determined type of operation promotion effect is set (step C504), and the operation promotion effect setting process is completed. Specifically, the effect control device 300 sets, for example, a normal button operation promotion effect when the determined type of operation promotion effect is a normal button operation promotion effect. As a result, the normal button operation promotion effect is executed at a predetermined timing, and the effect button 2
When 5 is operated in the operation mode as instructed during the operation valid period, a predetermined success effect is executed at a predetermined rate.
Further, when the determined type of operation promotion effect is a specific button operation promotion effect, a specific button operation promotion effect is set. As a result, the specific button operation promotion effect is executed at a predetermined timing, and when the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode as instructed during the operation valid period, the predetermined success effect is executed at a predetermined rate.
Further, when the determined type of operation promotion effect is the touch operation promotion effect, the touch operation promotion effect is set. As a result, the touch operation promotion effect is executed at a predetermined timing, and when the touch panel 29 is operated in the operation mode as instructed during the operation valid period, the predetermined success effect is executed at a predetermined rate.

In the operation promotion effect (normal button operation promotion effect, touch operation promotion effect, specific button operation promotion effect), in addition to the display of the operation promotion images G1 and G2, the display of images other than the operation promotion images G1 and G1 and the frame decoration device. One of 18 or one of various effects using the light emission of the LED (including the LED built in the effect button 25) of the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board effect device 44, the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. Multiple are done.
Further, when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period, the display of the display device 41 or the voice from the speakers 19a and 19b may be used to notify that the operation has been accepted.

Further, in the successful production, the display of the display device 41, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46
Any one or a plurality of various effects using the light emission of the above, the operation of the board effect device 44, the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like are performed. Specifically, the success effect is, for example, a reach effect, an effect in which the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the running special figure variation display game changes, an effect in which a predetermined character appears, and a predetermined light emission. The effect is that the LED emits light in a mode, the movable accessory operates in a predetermined operation mode, the predetermined sound is output from the speaker, and the like. The timing for deciding whether or not to execute the success effect is arbitrary. For example, it may be decided by lottery or the like when the operation mode is as instructed during the operation validity period, or the operation validity period. It may be decided before the start of.

When the result is off or a small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), one of the normal button operation promotion effect and the touch operation promotion effect is selected as the type of the operation promotion effect to be executed. On the other hand, when the result is a big hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), one of the normal button operation promotion effect, the touch operation promotion effect, and the specific button operation promotion effect is selected as the operation promotion effect to be executed. Will be done.
The specific button operation promotion effect is not executed when the result is out of order or a small hit, and is executed only when the result is a big hit. That is, in the present embodiment, the specific button operation promotion effect is a jackpot confirmation effect. Further, when the result is off or a small hit, the normal button operation promotion effect is easier to be selected than the touch operation promotion effect. That is, in the present embodiment, the expectation of a big hit is high in the order of normal button operation promotion effect <touch operation promotion effect <specific button operation promotion effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure variation display game being executed can be suggested depending on the type of operation promotion effect to be executed.

In this embodiment, the same operation promotion effect distribution table is used depending on whether the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is a small hit or a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, when the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is a small hit, the type of the operation promotion effect to be executed is determined by referring to the operation promotion effect distribution table for the small hit, and the special figure to be executed this time. If the result of the figure variation display game is out of alignment, the type of operation promotion effect to be executed may be determined by referring to the operation promotion effect distribution table for the outlier.
Further, the specific button operation promotion effect may be executed when the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is a small hit.
Further, the specific button operation promotion effect may be executed when the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is different.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 instructs the effect control device 300 to execute the operation promotion effect (transmits the effect control device 300 a variation command including information on the variation pattern for executing the operation promotion effect). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the effect control device 300 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the operation promotion effect by lottery or the like at the start of the special figure variation display game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 is configured to determine the type of operation promotion effect to be executed with reference to the operation promotion effect distribution table, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example
The game control device 100 instructs the effect control device 300 to execute the operation promotion effect and the type of the operation promotion effect to be executed (variation command including information on the variation pattern for executing the normal button operation promotion effect to the effect control device 300). , A variation command containing information on a variation pattern for executing a touch operation promotion effect, or a variation command including information on a variation pattern for executing a specific button operation promotion effect) can be transmitted. FIG. 58 (d) shows an example of the operation promotion effect setting process executed at that time.

In this operation promotion effect setting process, when the variation command from the game control device 100 is a variation command including information on the variation pattern for executing the normal button operation promotion effect (step C601; Y), the operation mode (number of operations). (Including), etc., and set the normal button operation promotion effect (step C604).
Further, when the variation command from the game control device 100 is a variation command including information on the variation pattern for executing the specific button operation promotion effect (step C602; Y),
The operation mode (including the number of operations) and the like are determined, and the specific button operation promotion effect is set (step C605).
Further, when the variation command from the game control device 100 is a variation command including information on the variation pattern for executing the touch operation promotion effect (step C603; Y), the operation mode (including the number of operations) and the like are determined. And set the touch operation promotion effect (step C6)
06).

Further, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is suggested depending on the type of operation promotion effect to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not executed depending on the type of operation promotion effect to be executed. It may be configured to suggest the result of the special figure variation display game.
In this case, the effect control device 300 performs the operation promotion effect setting process (FIG. 58) in the look-ahead variation system command process (step C246) of the received command analysis process (FIG. 54), for example. In this operation effect setting process, first, there is an unexecuted hold display whose display mode changes in the decorative special figure start memory display (hereinafter referred to as "unexecuted hold display") corresponding to the unexecuted special figure variation display game. In this case, it is decided by lottery or the like whether or not to execute the operation promotion effect.

Then, when the execution of the operation promotion effect is decided (step C501; Y), the target special figure variation display game (special figure variation display game in which the display mode of the corresponding unexecuted hold display changes).
The operation promotion effect distribution table corresponding to the result of is set (step C502). Specifically, when the result of the target special figure variation display game is other than a big hit (that is, a miss or a small hit), the effect control device 300 is an operation promotion effect distribution table for other than the big hit (that is, For example, FIG. 58 (b) is set, while when the result of the target special figure variation display game is a big hit, an operation promotion effect distribution table for the big hit (for example, FIG. 58 (c)) is set.

Next, with reference to the set operation promotion effect distribution table, the type of operation promotion effect to be executed is determined (step C503), and the determined type of operation promotion effect is set (step C5).
04), the operation promotion effect setting process is completed. Specifically, the effect control device 300 sets, for example, a normal button operation promotion effect when the determined type of operation promotion effect is a normal button operation promotion effect. As a result, when the normal button operation promotion effect is executed at a predetermined timing and the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode as instructed during the operation valid period, a predetermined success effect (not here). The effect of changing the display mode of the execution hold display) is executed.
Further, when the determined type of operation promotion effect is a specific button operation promotion effect, a specific button operation promotion effect is set. As a result, when the specific button operation promotion effect is executed at a predetermined timing and the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode as instructed during the operation valid period, a predetermined success effect (not here). Production that changes the display mode of the execution hold display)
Is executed.
Further, when the determined type of operation promotion effect is the touch operation promotion effect, the touch operation promotion effect is set. As a result, when the touch operation promotion effect is executed at a predetermined timing and the touch panel 29 is operated in the operation mode as instructed during the operation valid period, a predetermined success effect (here, unexecuted hold) is performed at a predetermined rate. The effect of changing the display mode of the display) is executed.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result, the first
An operation means (effect button 25), a second operation means (touch panel 29), a promotion effect execution means (effect control device 300) for executing a promotion effect (operation promotion effect) that encourages the player to operate, and
The promotion effect is a first promotion image (effect button image G11) that encourages the operation of the first operation means.
Is displayed and a second promotion image (touch panel image G) that encourages the operation of the second operation means.
The promotion effect (21) is displayed, the first promotion image can be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode, and the first promotion image is displayed in the first display mode (21). The normal button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 57 (a))) is expected to generate a special gaming state more than the promotion effect in which the second promotion image is displayed (touch operation promotion effect (see FIG. 57 (b))). The second promotion image is displayed as the promotion effect (specific button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 57 (c))) in which the degree (big hit expectation degree) is low and the first promotion image is displayed in the second display mode. This is a production with a higher degree of expectation that a special gaming state will occur than the promotion effect (touch operation promotion effect (see FIG. 57 (b))).

That is, there are two types of display modes of the first promotion image, and the jackpot expectation of the promotion effect in which the first promotion image is displayed depends on the type of display mode of the first promotion image, and the promotion effect in which the second promotion image is displayed. Because it becomes lower and higher than, the variation of promotion production increases,
The promotion effect can enhance the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, the first display mode and the second display mode of the first promotion image (effect button image G11)
The display size of the first promotion image is different depending on the display mode, but the difference may be any one or more of the display size, color, display position, presence / absence of blinking, and the like.
Further, in addition to (or instead of) the display mode of the effect button image G11, the display mode (display size, color, display position, etc.) of other images (notification image G12, instruction image G13) included in the button operation promotion image G1. Any one or more of the presence or absence of blinking may be different.
Further, the first operating means is not limited to the effect button 25 and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the second operating means is not limited to the touch panel 29 and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the first operating means and the second operating means may be the same operating means.
Specifically, for example, the effect button 25 is in a protruding state (a state shown in FIG. 1) from a normal state (a state shown in FIG. 1).
When the upper surface of the effect button 25 is configured to be convertible to a state in which the upper surface is above the normal state), the first operation means is set to the effect button 25 in the normal state, and the second operation means is the effect in the protruding state. Button 25 may be used. In that case, for example, in the operation promotion effect (projection button operation promotion effect) for urging the operation of the effect button 25 in the projecting state, as shown in FIG. 59A, for example, the projecting button imitating the effect button 25 in the projecting state. The image G31, the notification image G32 (for example, a time bar image) that notifies the remaining length of the operation valid period, and the instruction image G13 (for example, "press") that instructs the operation mode (including the number of operations) of the effect button 25 in the protruding state. "!" And "3 consecutive hits!"
The protruding button operation promotion image G3 including the character image) is displayed on the display device 41.

Further, in that case, for example, as shown in FIGS. 59 (b) and 59 (c), the promotion effect in which the first promotion image is displayed in the first display mode (normal button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 57 (a))). , The second
The promotion effect (specification) in which the first promotion image is displayed in the second display mode, with a lower expectation of big hit than the promotion effect (protruding button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 58 (a))) in which the promotion image is displayed. The button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 57 (c))) is set to have a higher expectation of a big hit than the promotion effect in which the second promotion image is displayed (protruding button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 58 (a))). It is also possible to configure it as follows.

<Protruding button>
Here, when the effect button 25 is configured to be convertible from the normal state to the projecting state, the effect control device 300 controls, for example, a driving means (not shown) for converting the effect button 25 to the projecting state. The confirmation operation for confirming whether the effect button 25 can be converted into the protruding state is executed. Then, when it is found in the confirmation operation that it cannot be converted into the protruding state, the non-protruding flag is set. This confirmation operation is, for example, an operation of converting the effect button 25 from the normal state to the protruding state and then returning from the protruding state to the normal state, and is executed, for example, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on or when the RAM is initialized. Direction button 2
It is performed as part of the initialization operation of 5.

In the initialization operation of the effect button 25, for example, the LED built in the effect button 25 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern. Further, when the effect button 25 is configured to be convertible from the normal state to the protruding state, the effect button 25 is confirmed in addition to the light emission of the LED. At that time, the LED light emission pattern is different between the initialization operation executed when the power is turned on and the initialization operation executed when the RAM is initialized, but the operation pattern of the confirmation operation is the same.

If the effect button 25 cannot be converted into the protruding state due to a malfunction of the driving means or the like, displaying the protruding button image G31 may give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, when the effect button 25 is configured to be convertible from the normal state to the protruding state, the operation promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 60 is executed instead of the operation promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 58 (a). You may.
In this operation promotion effect setting process, when the operation promotion effect is executed (step C501; Y).
In), for example, it is determined whether or not the effect button 25 is in the initial state based on the signal from the sensor that detects that the effect button 25 is in the initial state (normal state) (step C511).
In the initial state (step C511; Y), the processes of steps C502 to C504 are executed. On the other hand, when it is not in the initial state (step C511; N), the effect button 25
After the effect button 25 is returned to the initial state (normal state) by controlling the driving means (not shown) (step C512), the processes of steps C502 to C504 are executed.

Then, it is determined in step C504 whether or not the protrusion button operation promotion effect is set (step C513), and when the protrusion button operation promotion effect is not set (step C513; N),
That is, when the operation promotion effect set in step C504 is a normal button operation promotion effect or a specific button operation promotion effect, the operation promotion effect setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the protrusion button operation promotion effect is set in step C504 (step C513).
In Y), it is determined whether or not the protrusion button operation promotion effect can be executed (step C514).
). When the protrusion button operation promotion effect is feasible (step C514; Y), that is, when the protrusion impossible flag is not set, the operation promotion effect setting process ends. As a result, when the protruding button operation promotion effect is executed at a predetermined timing, the effect button 25 is converted into the protruding state, and the protruding button 25 is operated in the operation mode as instructed during the operation valid period. A predetermined success effect is executed at a predetermined rate, and for example, the effect button 25 returns to the normal state after the end of the operation valid period.

On the other hand, when the protruding button operation promotion effect is not feasible (step C514; N), that is, when the projecting impossible flag is set, the normal size effect button image G11 is displayed instead of the protruding button image G31. Is set (step C515) to end the operation promotion effect setting process. As a result, when the protruding button image G31 is displayed, the normal size effect button image G11 is displayed, and the effect button 25 in the normal state is operated in the operation mode as instructed during the operation valid period. A predetermined success effect is executed at the rate of.
That is, in this case, the operation promotion image is not the button image (protruding button image G31) displayed by the protruding button operation promoting effect, but the button image (normal size effect button image G11) displayed by the normal button operation promoting effect. ) Is displayed, but for the effects other than the display of the button image and the protrusion of the effect button 25, the effect executed by the protrusion button operation promotion effect is executed. Display of button image and effect The effect other than the protrusion of the button 25 is, for example, display of other images (notification image, instruction image) included in the operation promotion image, display of an image other than the operation promotion image, frame decoration device 18 LED of the panel decoration device 46 (LED built in the effect button 25)
(Including), the operation of the board effect device 44, the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, the vibration of the effect button 25, and the like.

In the present embodiment, in step C515, the display of the button image (normal size effect button image G11) displayed in the normal button operation promotion effect is set instead of the protruding button image G31. Of course, instead of the protruding button image G31, the button image displayed in the specific button operation promotion effect (the effect button image G1 having a size larger than the normal size).
Although it is possible to set the display of 1), the specific button operation promotion effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the protruding button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 59 (b)). Therefore, when the effect button image G11 having a size larger than the normal size is displayed instead of the protruding button image G31,
There is a risk that the player's expectation will be excessively fueled. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the non-protruding flag is set, the button displayed in the normal button operation promoting effect, which has a lower expectation of a big hit than the protruding button operation promoting effect, instead of the protruding button image G31. An image (normal size effect button image G11) is displayed.

Further, when the effect button 25 is configured to be convertible from a normal state to a protruding state,
Instead of the operation promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 58 (a), the operation promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 61 (a) may be executed.
In this operation promotion effect setting process, when the protrusion button operation promotion effect is not feasible (step C514; N), that is, when the non-protrusion flag is set, the driving means (not shown) of the effect button 25 is used. A confirmation operation for controlling and confirming whether the effect button 25 can be converted into the protruding state is executed (step C516). Then, step C51
When it is found that the state can be converted to the protruding state in the confirmation operation in step 6 (step C51).
7; Y) ends the operation promotion effect setting process. At that time, the non-protrudable flag may be cleared. On the other hand, when it is found in the confirmation operation in step C516 that it cannot be converted into the protruding state (step C517; N), the display of the normal size effect button image G11 is set instead of the protruding button image G31. (Step C515), the operation promotion effect setting process is completed.

The operation promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 61A, that is, the operation promotion effect setting process for performing the confirmation operation, is compared with the operation promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 60, that is, the operation promotion effect setting process for which the confirmation operation is not performed. The display frequency of the protruding button image G31 can be increased. However, if the effect button 25 is confirmed at the start or during the execution of the special figure variation display game, the effect button 2
There is a risk that the player's expectation that 5 will protrude will be fueled. Therefore, the operation promotion effect performed during the special figure variation display game is set by the operation promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 60, and is performed during a period other than the special figure variation display game (for example, during the special game state). The promotion effect is preferably set by the operation promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 61 (a).
When performing an operation promotion effect during a special game state, for example, a jackpot command process (FIG. 5).
In the round effect setting process (step C405) of 6), the operation promotion effect setting process (step C405), etc.
Any one of the operation promotion effect setting processes shown in FIGS. 58, 60, and 61 (a)) is executed.
At that time, in the operation promotion effect setting process, the type of operation promotion effect to be executed is determined with reference to, for example, the operation promotion effect distribution table as shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and 61 (c).

Specifically, for example, in the round effect setting process corresponding to the round after the specific round (in the case of this embodiment, the first round) in which the game ball may flow into the specific area, the operation promotion effect setting The process is executed. Then, when there is no V passage in the specific round, the type of the operation promotion effect is determined with reference to the operation promotion effect distribution table for no V passage (for example, FIG. 61B). On the other hand, when there is V passage in the specific round, the type of operation promotion effect is determined with reference to the operation promotion effect distribution table for V passage (for example, FIG. 61 (c)).

Further, the look-ahead variable command process (step C24) of the received command analysis process (FIG. 54).
In 6), it is also possible to perform the operation promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. That is,
It is also possible to change the display mode of the unexecuted hold display when the effect button 25 in the protruding state is operated. Further, it is also possible to change the display mode of the unexecuted hold display only when the effect button 25 in the normal state is operated.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result, the first
An operation means (effect button 25) capable of converting from a state (normal state) to a second state (protruding state), and a confirmation operation for confirming whether or not the operation means can be converted to a second state. It is provided with a confirmation operation control means (effect control device 300) to be executed and a promotion effect execution means (effect control device 300) for executing a promotion effect (operation promotion effect) that encourages the player to operate the operation means. Is a first promotion effect (normal button operation promotion effect, specific button operation promotion effect) in which a first promotion image (effect button image G11) imitating the operation means in the first state is displayed, and an operation means in the second state. When the execution of the second promotion effect is determined, the promotion effect execution means includes the second promotion effect (protruding button operation promotion effect) in which the second promotion image (protruding button image G31) imitating the above is displayed. If the confirmation operation cannot convert the operating means to the second state, a predetermined process (for example, a normal size instead of the protruding button image G31) is used instead of the process of executing the second promotion effect. The process of setting the display of the effect button image G11 (step C515)) is executed (see FIG. 60).

Therefore, when the operation means (effect button 25) cannot be converted into the second state (protruding state), the predetermined process is executed, so that it is possible to execute the promotion effect (operation promotion effect) without a sense of discomfort. , The promotion effect can enhance the interest of the game.
The predetermined process is not limited to the process of stopping the display of the protruding button image G31 and setting the display of the effect button image G11 (step C515), and can be appropriately changed. Prescribed processing
For example, it may be a process of canceling the execution of the operation promotion effect, a process of stopping the display of the protruding button image G31 (the display of the effect button image G11 is not set), or the protruding button as usual. The process may be a process of displaying the image G31 and canceling the operation acceptance of the effect button 25 during the operation valid period, or the protruding button image G31 is displayed as usual and the effect button 25 is displayed at a predetermined timing during the operation valid period. May be a process of determining that the effect button 25 has been operated (determining that the effect button 25 has been operated even though the effect button 25 has not been operated, and executing a predetermined success effect at a predetermined rate).

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the confirmation operation control means (effect control device 300) is a case where it is determined to execute the second promotion effect (protruding button operation promotion effect) during the special game state. If it is not possible to convert the operating means (effect button 25) to the second state (protruding state) in the confirmation operation, the operating means is converted to the second state before the start of the second promotion effect. The reconfirmation operation for confirming whether or not is possible is executed (step C516), and the promotion effect execution means (effect control device 300) decides to execute the second promotion effect during the special gaming state. If the operation means cannot be converted to the second state by the reconfirmation operation, the predetermined process may be executed instead of the process of executing the second promotion effect. It is possible (see FIG. 61 (a)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the second promotion effect.
In the present embodiment, the operation pattern of the confirmation operation of the effect button 25 (confirmation operation at the time of initialization operation) and the operation pattern of the reconfirmation operation of the effect button 25 (confirmation operation in step C516) are the same. , The operation pattern may be different between the confirmation operation and the reconfirmation operation.
Further, when it is decided to execute the second promotion effect during a period other than the special gaming state (for example, during the special figure variation display game), the reconfirmation operation may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the effect button 25 can be converted into the projecting state based on whether or not the non-protruding flag is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect. The effect button 25 is based on whether or not the button 25 is in the initial state (normal state).
May be determined whether can be converted into a protruding state. An example of the operation promotion effect setting process executed at that time is shown in FIGS. 62 and 63.

The operation promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 62 is executed, for example, in the variation effect setting process (step C365) of the variation system command process (FIG. 55). That is, the operation promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 62 is, for example, a process that is executed at the start of the special figure variation display game and sets information for performing the operation promotion effect during the special figure variation display game.
In this operation promotion effect setting process, when the variation command from the game control device 100 is a variation command including information on the variation pattern for executing the normal button operation promotion effect (step C611; Y), the operation mode (number of operations). (Including), etc., set the normal button operation promotion effect (step C614), and end the operation promotion effect setting process.
Further, when the variation command from the game control device 100 is a variation command including information on the variation pattern for executing the specific button operation promotion effect (step C612; Y),
The operation mode (including the number of operations) and the like are determined, the specific button operation promotion effect is set (step C615), and the operation promotion effect setting process is completed.

Further, when the variation command from the game control device 100 is a variation command including information on the variation pattern for executing the protrusion button operation promotion effect (step C613; Y),
The operation mode (including the number of operations) and the like are determined, and the protruding button operation promotion effect is set (step C616). Then, for example, based on the signal from the sensor that detects that the effect button 25 is in the initial state (normal state), it is determined whether the effect button 25 is in the initial state (step C617), and when it is in the initial state (step C617). In step C617; Y), it is determined that the effect button 25 can be converted into the protruding state, and the operation promotion effect setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is not in the initial state (step C617; N), that is, if it has not returned to the initial state, a predetermined defect (failure of the drive means of the effect button 25, clogging with dust, etc.) has occurred as the cause. Therefore, it is determined that the effect button 25 cannot be converted into the projecting state, the setting of the projecting button operation promotion effect is canceled (step C618), and the operation promotion effect setting process is terminated. As a result, the setting in step C616 is canceled, so that the execution of the protruding button operation promotion effect is stopped.

At the start of the special figure variation display game, it is determined whether or not the effect button 25 is in the initial state based on the signal from the sensor that detects that the effect button 25 is in the initial state (normal state). The timing for determining whether or not the initial state is based on the signal from is appropriately changeable. For example, at the end of the special figure variation display game, it is determined whether or not the effect button 25 is in the initial state based on the signal from the sensor that detects that the effect button 25 is in the initial state (normal state), and in the initial state. If there is, the initial state flag is set, if it is not the initial state, the initial state flag is cleared, and at the start of the special figure variation display game, if the initial state flag is set, the effect button 25 is in the initial state. Determined to be (step C617; Y)
Then, when the initial state flag is not set, it may be determined that the effect button 25 is not in the initial state (step C617; N).

The operation promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 63 is executed, for example, in the round effect setting process (step C405) of the jackpot command process (FIG. 56). That is, the operation promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 63 is, for example, a process that is executed during the special game state and sets information for performing the operation promotion effect during the special game state.
In this operation promotion effect setting process, first, the processes of steps C501 to C504 are executed. Then, it is determined in step C504 whether or not the protrusion button operation promotion effect is set (step C521), and when the protrusion button operation promotion effect is not set (step C521; N),
That is, when the operation promotion effect set in step C504 is a normal button operation promotion effect or a specific button operation promotion effect, the operation promotion effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the protrusion button operation promotion effect is set in step C504 (step C521).
In Y), for example, it is determined whether or not the effect button 25 is in the initial state (step C522) based on the signal from the sensor that detects that the effect button 25 is in the initial state (normal state).
), In the initial state (step C522; Y), it is determined that the effect button 25 can be converted into the protruding state, and the operation promotion effect setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is not in the initial state (step C522; N), the driving means (not shown) of the effect button 25 is controlled to execute the operation of returning the effect button 25 to the initial state (normal state) (step C522; N).
Step C523), and then again, for example, based on the signal from the sensor that detects that the effect button 25 is in the initial state (normal state), it is determined whether the effect button 25 is in the initial state (step C524). Then, in the case of the initial state (step C524; Y), it is determined that the effect button 25 can be converted into the protruding state, and the operation promotion effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is not in the initial state (step C524; N), that is, if it has not returned to the initial state, a predetermined defect (malfunction of the drive means for converting the effect button 25 into the protruding state, clogging with dust, etc.) may be the cause. Since it is considered that the effect button 25 has occurred, it is determined that the effect button 25 cannot be converted into the protruding state, the setting of the projecting button operation promotion effect is canceled (step C525), and the operation promotion effect setting process is terminated. As a result, the setting in step C504 is canceled, so that the execution of the protruding button operation promotion effect is stopped.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable display game (special figure variable display game).
In a game machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of is a special result, an operation means (effect button) capable of converting from the first state (normal state) to the second state (protruding state). 25), a confirmation control means (effect control device 300) for confirming whether or not the operation means is in the first state at the start or stop of the variable display game, and a promotion effect for urging the player to operate the operation means. A promotion effect execution means (effect control device 300) for executing (operation promotion effect) is provided, and a first promotion image (effect button image G11) imitating the operation means in the first state is displayed for the promotion effect. The first promotion effect (normal button operation promotion effect, specific button operation promotion effect) and the second promotion effect (protruding button operation) in which the second promotion image (protruding button image G31) imitating the operation means in the second state is displayed. The promotion effect execution means includes the case where the execution of the second promotion effect is determined, and the operation means is not in the first state in the above confirmation (step C6).
17; N) can be configured to execute a predetermined process instead of the process of executing the second promotion effect (see FIG. 62).

With this configuration, if the operating means (effect button 25) cannot be converted to the second state (protruding state), a predetermined process is executed, so that a comfortable promotion effect (operation promotion effect) can be achieved. It becomes possible to execute it, and the interest of the game can be enhanced by the promotion effect.
When it is decided to execute the first promotion effect (normal button operation promotion effect, specific button operation promotion effect) and it is confirmed that the operation means is not in the first state (normal state),
It is also possible to configure a predetermined process to be executed instead of the process for executing the first promotion effect.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the confirmation control means (effect control device 300) is
When it is decided to execute the second promotion effect (protruding button operation promotion effect) during the special gaming state, it is confirmed whether or not the operation means (effect button 25) is in the first state (normal state). When it is confirmed by the confirmation that the operating means is not in the first state (step C522; N).
) Is to execute a confirmation operation for setting the operating means to the first state before the start of the second promotion effect (step C523), and the promotion effect execution means (effect control device 300) performs the second promotion effect. When it is decided to execute during the special game state and the operation means cannot be set to the first state by the confirmation operation (step C524; N), the second promotion effect is executed. It is possible to configure to execute a predetermined process instead of the process (see FIG. 62).
..

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the second promotion effect.
The predetermined process is a process of canceling the execution of the protrusion button operation promotion effect (step C618).
, C525) and can be changed as appropriate. The predetermined processing is, for example, the protruding button image G.
It may be a process of stopping the display of 31 and setting the display of the effect button image G11, or a process of stopping the display of the protruding button image G31 (the display of the effect button image G11 is not set). Then, the process may be a process of displaying the protruding button image G31 as usual and canceling the operation acceptance of the effect button 25 during the operation valid period, or displaying the protruding button image G31 as usual and determining the predetermined position during the operation valid period. The process may be such that the effect button 25 is operated at the timing of (the effect button 25 is operated even though it is not operated, and a predetermined success effect is executed at a predetermined rate).

Further, when it is decided to execute the first promotion effect (normal button operation promotion effect, specific button operation promotion effect) during the special gaming state, the operation means (effect button 25) is in the first state (normal state). If it is confirmed that the operating means is not in the first state by the confirmation, a confirmation operation for putting the operating means in the first state before the start of the first promotion effect is performed. Is executed, and when the operation means cannot be set to the first state by the confirmation operation, it is also possible to configure to execute a predetermined process instead of the process of executing the first promotion effect.

Further, in addition to the normal button operation promotion effect, the specific button operation promotion effect, and the protruding button operation promotion effect, a touch operation promotion effect (see FIG. 57B) may be executed. That is, even when the effect button 25 is configured to be convertible from the normal state to the protruding state, the touch operation promotion effect can be executed. In this case, for example, the expectation of a big hit is high in the order of normal button operation promotion effect <touch operation promotion effect <protruding button operation effect <specific button operation promotion effect.

Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a second operating means (touch panel 29) different from the operating means (effect button 25), and is provided with a promotion effect executing means (effect control device 300).
Further, it is possible to execute a third promotion effect (touch operation promotion effect (see FIG. 57B)) in which a promotion image (touch panel image G21) for prompting the operation of the second operation means is displayed, and the first promotion The image can be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode, and the promotion effect in which the first promotion image is displayed in the first display mode (normal button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 57A)) is It is an effect with a lower expectation (big hit expectation) that a special gaming state occurs than the third promotion effect, and the promotion effect in which the first promotion image is displayed in the second display mode (specific button operation promotion effect (FIG. 57). (C))) can be configured to be an effect with a higher degree of expectation that a special gaming state is generated than the third promotion effect.

<Explanatory production>
The effect control device 300 can execute an explanatory effect for explaining the game. In the present embodiment, three types of explanatory effects, a first explanatory effect, a second explanatory effect, and a third explanatory effect, can be executed.
In the first explanatory effect, character information (first character information M1) for explaining the effect is displayed. The first character information M1 is composed of a character string having a predetermined number of characters (for example, 8) or more, and is scrolled and displayed so as to flow in a predetermined direction (here, from right to left) as shown in FIG. 64, for example.

FIG. 64 shows an example of the first explanatory effect executed during the operation promotion effect. This first explanatory effect can be executed regardless of whether the type of operation promotion effect to be executed is a normal button operation promotion effect or the type of operation promotion effect to be executed is a specific button operation promotion effect. When the one-character information M1 is displayed to the end, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (d), at a predetermined ratio (
That is, only when the type of operation promotion effect to be executed is a specific button operation promotion effect),
The normal size effect button image G11 is changed to an effect button image G11 having a size larger than the normal size. In the first explanatory effect, not only the first character information M1 but also additional information (image, moving image, etc.) for supplementing or decorating the first character information M1 may be displayed. Specifically, the additional information includes, for example, an image or a moving image that decorates a part of the first character information M1 (for example, an effect displayed superimposed on the "deca button" part in the first character information M1. An image (this effect image also moves from right to left along with the "deca button" part) can be mentioned. Further, as additional information, for example, the first character information M1
Images and videos that supplement a part of (For example, a button image displayed in the supplementary window to supplement what kind of image (video) the "deca button" in the first character information M1 is) Can be mentioned. Supplement From the viewpoint of preventing misidentification, the window is a predetermined area (for example, the upper left of the screen)
It is preferable that the decoration special figure is displayed in an area other than the area where the start memory display is displayed, the area where the special figure variation display game is executed (the area where the decoration identification symbol is displayed), and the area where the effect is executed). ..
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 64, the display size of the effect button image G11 is changed during the operation valid period (the type of the operation promotion effect is changed from the normal button operation promotion effect to the specific button operation promotion effect). However, the display size of the effect button image G11 may change before the start of the operation valid period.

Further, the first explanatory effect is not limited to displaying character information for explaining the operation promotion effect. That is, the first character information M1 is not limited to the character information for explaining the operation promotion effect. Specifically, the first character information M1 is character information for explaining a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display (for example, "when the hold changes to a rainbow color, it heats up !!"). It may be, or character information for explaining an effect of changing the display mode of an image (background image, character image, decoration identification information, etc.) other than the decoration special figure start memory display (for example, "the background is a tiger pattern"). It may be "hot heat !!"), or text information ("hot heat when a tiger character appears !!") that explains the effect of making a predetermined image (character image, etc.) appear. In addition, character information for explaining a step-up effect (for example, "", which is composed of a plurality of unit effects and the expectation of a big hit increases as the unit effects progress in sequence.
If you go up to 4 steps, you will get a fever! !! ”) One decoration based on one special figure start memory Character information for explaining a pseudo-continuous effect in which a unit variable display for displaying a plurality of identification information variable for a predetermined period is performed one or more times in a special figure variable display game ( For example, "Pseudo triplet big hit !?"), character information for explaining the character production in which the movable character operates (for example, "Big hit when the character moves to XX !?"), and reach production will be explained. Character information for this purpose (for example, "The reach of a special pattern is extremely hot !!") may be used.

In the second explanatory effect, character information (second character information M2) for instructing the player is displayed. The second character information M2 is composed of a character string having a number of characters less than a predetermined number (for example, 8), and is displayed at one time without being scrolled, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (a). FIG. 65 (a)
) Shows an example of the second explanatory effect executed during a specific round in which the game ball may flow into the specific area. It should be noted that the second explanatory effect can be executed other than during the specific round.
For example, it can be executed at the time of right-handed or left-handed, and in this case, for example, the second character information M2 such as "right-handed!" Or "left-handed!" Is displayed.
As shown in the examples shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 (a), the character size of the second character information M2 is
It is preferable that the character size of the first character information M1 is larger than the character size.

The differences between the first explanatory effect and the second explanatory effect include the following points.
The execution time of the first explanation effect (the time required to display the first character information M1 from the beginning to the end) is predetermined and is not affected by the game content or other time values. The execution time of the second explanatory effect (time for displaying the second explanatory information M2) may be affected by the game content and other time values.
In addition, the first explanatory effect may be so-called ghost, that is, even if the first character information M1 such as "Big hit when a big button is displayed in the button effect !?" is displayed, the big button is not displayed (effect button image). The display size of G11 does not change from the normal size to a size larger than the normal size), whereas the second explanatory effect is not a so-called ghost.
In addition, while the first explanation effect is being executed, the dedicated BGM and sound effects are not output, while the second
During the execution of the explanation effect, it is possible to output a dedicated BGM or sound effect.
Further, the first character information M1 displayed in the first explanatory effect has a plurality of display modes for each effect to be described, whereas the second character information M2 displayed in the second explanatory effect has a plurality of display modes. There is no display mode. Specifically, for example, in the first explanatory effect executed during the operation promotion effect, the first character information M1 is "a big hit when a big button is displayed in the button effect !?" And reach may occur !! ”etc. can also be displayed. On the other hand, in the second explanatory effect executed during the specific round, only "Aim for V!" Can be displayed as the second character information M2.

In addition, the explanation given in the second explanatory effect is an explanation related to the result of the game (affecting the result of the game). That is, since the second character information M2 is information that the player wants to understand more than the first character information M1, the second character is displayed before the second character information M2 is displayed (for example, before the start of the specific round). Prior information, which is more detailed information of the information M2, may be displayed. Specifically, for example, by displaying prior information, where the "V" in "Aim for V!" Is located, an image that imitates an actual game board (irrelevant part (irrelevant part (unrelated part)) For example, this special figure placed outside the game area, nails in the game area, movable members around V, etc.) are not displayed) to suggest the placement location of "V (specific area)", and then "V" (Specific area) ”to suggest the shortest path / locus that the game ball can pass through and the path / locus that may pass roughly (especially if the nail is not displayed, the general path / locus). You may.

In the third explanation production, the player is alerted or during a predetermined period (for example, waiting for a customer).
Character information for explaining the functions of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 in
The third character information M3) is displayed. The third character information M3 is composed of a character string having a predetermined number of characters (for example, 8) or more, and is displayed at once without being scrolled, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (b).
The third character information M3 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 65 (b) and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the third character information M3 may be, for example, "please remove the ball from the lower plate", "the stage can be changed by operating a button", "the volume can be adjusted with the touch panel", or the like.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game is related to the game machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special character variation display game) becomes a special result. An explanatory effect executing means (effect control device 300) for executing an explanatory effect for explaining is provided, and in the explanatory effect, character information (first character information M1) having a predetermined number of characters or more is displayed, and
The first explanation effect that does not display the character information at once, and the character information of the number of characters less than the predetermined number (second)
Includes a second explanatory effect in which the character information M2) is displayed and the character information is displayed at once.

Therefore, since it is possible to execute two types of explanatory effects of different types, that is, two types of explanatory effects in which the number of characters of the character information and whether or not to display the character information at one time are different, the variation of the explanatory effects increases and the explanation is given. The entertainment of the game can be enhanced by the production.
As a method of not displaying the first character information M1 once, a method of scrolling and displaying the first character information M1 so as to flow in a predetermined direction has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an image hiding the first character information M1 is gradually displayed. It may be a method of making it smaller.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first explanatory effect is an effect related to the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) at which a special gaming state occurs, and the second explanatory effect is an effect in which a special gaming state occurs. It can be configured so that the production is not related to the degree of expectation. Specifically, for example, FIG. 64.
In the example shown in, the type of operation promotion effect is switched from the normal button operation promotion effect to the specific button operation promotion effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal button operation promotion effect as the first explanatory effect is executed. There is.

With this configuration, the character information is not displayed at once in the first explanatory effect related to the jackpot expectation. Therefore, since the content of the explanation by the first explanation production can be gradually grasped, it is possible to prolong the time until the player grasps the jackpot expectation, and it is possible to continue the interest. On the other hand, in the second explanatory effect regardless of the jackpot expectation degree, the character information is displayed at once, so that the player can quickly grasp the content of the explanation by the second explanatory effect.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the explanatory effect, the character information (third character information M3) having a predetermined number or more of characters is further displayed, and the character information is displayed at once. It can be configured to include an explanatory effect.
With this configuration, the variation of the explanation effect increases, and it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game by the explanation effect.

<Battle production>
The effect control device 300 can execute a battle effect in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character. In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute three types of battle effects: the first battle effect, the second battle effect, and the third battle effect.
In the first battle effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c), the number of ally characters (the number of ally characters appearing) is smaller than the number of enemy characters (the number of enemy characters appearing). Is.
The second battle effect is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (d) to 66 (f), in which the number of ally characters is the same as the number of enemy characters.
As shown in FIG. 67, for example, the third battle effect is a battle effect in which the number of ally characters is larger than the number of enemy characters.
In the present embodiment, the battle effect is executed as a kind of reach effect, but the battle effect is not limited to the reach effect and can be changed as appropriate.

The effect control device 300 is, for example, a variable effect setting process (FIG. 55) for variable command processing (FIG. 55).
In step C365), the battle effect setting process for setting the information for performing the battle effect is executed. An example of the battle effect setting process is shown in FIG. 68 (a).
In this battle effect setting process, first, based on the variation command from the game control device 100, it is determined whether to execute the battle effect in the special figure variation display game to be executed this time (step C).
701). Then, when the battle effect is not executed in the special figure variation display game executed this time (step C701; N), the battle effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when executing a battle effect in the special figure variation display game to be executed this time (step C70)
1; Y), that is, when the variation command from the game control device 100 is a variation command including information on the variation pattern for executing the battle effect, the battle effect vibration corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time. The minute table is set (step C702). Specifically, the effect control device 300 determines, for example, that the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is other than a big hit (that is, a miss or a small hit) based on a symbol command from the game control device 100. If so, a battle production distribution table for purposes other than jackpots (for example, Fig. 68 (Fig. 68)
While b)) is set, if it is determined that the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is a big hit, a battle effect distribution table for big hits (for example, FIG. 68 (c)) is set.

Next, the type of battle effect to be executed is determined with reference to the set battle effect distribution table (step C703). In step C703, in addition to the type of battle effect to be executed, the type of character to appear is determined by lottery or the like. In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the ally characters include the ally character A and the ally character B.
There are two types, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (e), there are two types of enemy characters, enemy character A and enemy character B.

Then, the determined type of battle effect is set (step C704), and the battle effect setting process is completed. As a result, the battle effect is started at a predetermined timing.
In the battle production (first battle production, second battle production, third battle production), in addition to the display of the ally character and the enemy character, the display of images other than the ally character and the enemy character,
LED light emission of frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46, operation of board effect device 44, speaker 19
One or a plurality of various effects using sounds from a and 19b are performed.

Specifically, when the determined type of battle effect is the first battle effect, the effect control device 300 is the first battle effect in which the number of ally characters is smaller than the number of enemy characters in step C704. To set. As a result, if the first battle effect is executed at a predetermined timing and the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is a big hit, the ally character wins, and the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is If it is not a big hit, the ally character is defeated. In the examples shown in FIGS. 66A to 66C, since the ally character has won, the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is a big hit.
Note that FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c) exemplify a case where "ally character A" is selected as the type of ally character to appear, but of course, the ally character to appear in the first battle effect. The type may be ally character A or ally character B.

Further, when the determined type of battle effect is the second battle effect, the effect control device 300 sets the second battle effect in step C704, in which the number of ally characters is the same as the number of enemy characters. .. As a result, if the second battle effect is executed at a predetermined timing and the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is a big hit, the ally character wins, and the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is If it is not a big hit, the ally character is defeated. In the examples shown in FIGS. 66 (d) to 66 (f), since the ally character is defeated, the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is a miss or a small hit.

It should be noted that FIGS. 66 (d) to 66 (f) illustrate the case where "Friend character A" is selected as the type of the ally character to appear, but of course, the ally character to appear in the second battle production. The type may be ally character A or ally character B.
Further, FIGS. 66 (d) to 66 (f) illustrate the case where "enemy character A" is selected as the type of the enemy character to be made to appear, but of course, the enemy character to be made to appear in the second battle effect. The type may be enemy character A or enemy character B.

Further, when the determined type of battle effect is the third battle effect, the effect control device 300 sets the third battle effect, which is a battle effect in which the number of ally characters is larger than the number of enemy characters, in step C704. .. As a result, if the third battle effect is executed at a predetermined timing and the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is a big hit, the ally character wins, and the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is If it is not a big hit, the ally character is defeated. In the example shown in FIG. 67, since the ally character has won, the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is a big hit.
Note that FIG. 67 illustrates a case where "enemy character A" is selected as the type of enemy character to appear, but of course, the type of enemy character to appear in the third battle production is enemy character A. It may be present, or it may be the enemy character B.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 67, the second battle effect is executed and then the third battle effect is executed, that is, a ally character is added in the middle, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 67, first, the second battle effect (FIGS. 67 (a) to (b)) is executed, and the ally character is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of developing from normal reach to special reach). The third battle effect (FIGS. 67 (d) to (f)) is executed after the effect (FIG. 67 (c)) for notifying the addition of is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the third battle effect is executed. The third battle effect (FIGS. 67 (d) to (f)) may be suddenly executed without executing the two battle effect. When suddenly executing the third battle production, the third battle production may be started at a timing before the development from the normal reach to the special reach (for example, the timing when the normal reach starts), or from the normal reach to the special reach. The third battle production may be started at the timing of development.
Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 66A to 66C, the first battle effect is suddenly executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first battle effect is performed after the second battle effect is executed. You may try to do it. That is, an enemy character may be added on the way.

When the result is off or a small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the first battle effect is most likely to be selected, and the third battle effect is most difficult to select. Further, when the result is a big hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), the third battle effect is most likely to be selected, and the first battle effect is most difficult to be selected.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the expectation of a big hit is high in the order of the first battle production <second battle production <third battle production. That is, when the number of ally characters is N (N ≧ 1) and the number of enemy characters is M (M ≧ 1), the larger the NM, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure variation display game being executed can be suggested by the number of characters appearing in the battle effect.

The jackpot expectation may be different depending on the type of ally character that appears, or the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the type of enemy character that appears. Specifically, for example, when the ally character A is stronger than the ally character B, the first battle effect in which the ally character A appears has a higher expectation of a big hit than the first battle effect in which the ally character B appears. The second battle effect in which the ally character A appears may be set so that the expectation of a big hit is higher than that in the second battle effect in which the ally character B appears. Also,
When the enemy character A is stronger than the enemy character B, the third battle effect in which the enemy character A appears is set so that the jackpot expectation is lower than the third battle effect in which the enemy character B appears. The second battle production in which A appears is the second in which the enemy character B appears.
You may set it so that the big hit expectation is lower than the battle production.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same battle effect distribution table is used depending on whether the result of the special figure variation display game executed this time is a small hit or a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, when the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is a small hit, the type of the battle effect to be executed is determined by referring to the battle effect distribution table for the small hit, and the special figure variation to be executed this time. If the result of the display game is out of order, the type of battle effect to be executed may be determined by referring to the battle effect distribution table for the outlier.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 is configured to instruct the effect control device 300 to execute the battle effect (transmit the effect control device 300 a variation command including information on the variation pattern for executing the battle effect). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the variation command from the game control device 100 is a variation command including information on the variation pattern for executing the reach effect, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute the battle effect by lottery or the like. It is also possible to configure.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 is configured to determine the type of battle effect to be executed with reference to the battle effect distribution table, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game control device 100 instructs the effect control device 300 to execute the battle effect and the type of the battle effect to be executed (a variation command including information on the variation pattern for executing the first battle effect to the effect control device 300). It is also possible to configure either a variation command including information on the variation pattern for executing the second battle effect or a variation command including information on the variation pattern for executing the third battle effect).

Further, the types of ally characters are not limited to two types, ally character A and ally character B, and may be three or more types. In addition, the jackpot expectation may differ depending on the types of ally characters that appear and their combinations.
Further, the types of enemy characters are not limited to two types, enemy character A and enemy character B, and may be one type or three or more types. If there is only one type of enemy character (for example, only enemy character A), the first battle effect may be disabled, or multiple enemy characters of that type may appear in the first battle effect. .. In addition, the jackpot expectation may differ depending on the types of enemy characters that appear and their combinations.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special game is performed in the game machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special character variation display game) becomes a special result. A specific effect executing means (effect control device 300) for executing a specific effect (battle effect) capable of suggesting the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) at which a state occurs is provided, and the specific effect executing means is from the first character group. The selected first character (friendly character) and the second character (enemy character) selected from the second character group are displayed on the display device 41, and a plurality of characters in the first character group are displayed at one time. It is possible, and a plurality of characters in the second character group can be displayed at one time, and the number of first characters (number of ally characters) displayed at one time is N (N ≧ 1), and the second character is displayed at one time. Set the number of 2 characters (number of enemy characters) to M (M ≧)
In the case of 1), the larger the NM, the higher the expectation of a big hit (see FIG. 68 (b)).

Therefore, the jackpot expectation of a specific effect (battle effect) differs depending on the difference between the number of first characters displayed at one time (number of ally characters) and the number of second characters displayed at one time (number of enemy characters). Therefore, the variation of the specific effect is increased, and the fun of the game can be enhanced by the specific effect in which a plurality of characters appear.

It should be noted that what is suggested by the specific effect (battle effect) is not limited to the jackpot expectation, and may be, for example, the expectation that reach will occur.
Further, the same character may be displayed more than once. That is, for example, when the number of ally characters = 2, two ally characters A may appear, two ally characters B may appear, and one ally character A and one ally character B may appear. May appear. Further, for example, when the number of enemy characters = 2, two enemy characters A may appear, two enemy characters B may appear, and one enemy character A and one enemy character B may appear. May appear.
Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of N (the number of ally characters) is set to 2, but the upper limit of N is not limited to 2. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of M (the number of enemy characters) is set to 2, but the upper limit of M is not limited to 2.

<Transformation example 1 of battle production>
A plurality of ally characters may appear by exchanging ally characters in the middle of the battle production. That is, the number of ally characters may be the total number of ally characters displayed separately, not the number of ally characters displayed at one time.
Further, a plurality of enemy characters may appear by exchanging the enemy characters in the middle of the battle production. That is, the number of enemy characters may be the total number of enemy characters displayed separately, not the number of enemy characters displayed at one time.

FIG. 69 shows an example of the first battle effect in this modified example. In the battle effect shown in FIG. 69, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the enemy character is replaced from the enemy character A to the enemy character B during the battle effect. Further, in the battle production shown in FIG. 69,
Since the ally character has won, the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is a big hit.
FIG. 70 shows an example of the third battle effect in this modified example. In the battle effect shown in FIG. 70, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the ally character is replaced from the ally character A to the ally character B during the battle effect. Further, in the battle effect shown in FIG. 70, since the ally character has won, the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is a big hit.

FIG. 71 shows an example of the second battle effect in this modified example. In the battle effect shown in FIG. 71, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the ally character is replaced from the ally character A to the ally character B during the battle effect, and the battle is performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (f). In the middle of the production, the enemy character is replaced from the enemy character A to the enemy character B. Further, in the battle effect shown in FIG. 71, since the ally character has won, the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is a big hit.
In this modified example, the characters are replaced (that is, the number of ally characters = 2).
, The number of enemy characters = 2 pattern) or the pattern in which the characters do not change (that is, the number of ally characters = 1 and the number of enemy characters = 1) to determine whether to execute the second battle effect by lottery etc. It is configured to do. When a pattern in which the characters do not change is selected, for example, the second battle effect as shown in FIGS. 66 (d) to 66 (f) is executed.

In the case of the first battle effect in this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 69, the execution is performed from the start of the first battle effect to before the enemy characters are replaced (FIGS. 69 (a) to 69 (b)). It is not clear whether the battle production inside is the 1st battle production, the 2nd battle production, or the 3rd battle production, and from the time when the enemy characters are replaced until the end of the 1st battle production (Fig. 69 (Fig. 69 (Fig. 69)). In c) to (e), it is found that the battle effect being executed is not the third battle effect, but it is not clear whether it is the first battle effect or the second battle effect. Therefore, it is possible to continue the interest of the player from the start to the end of the first battle production.

Further, in the case of the second battle effect in this modified example, for example, as shown in FIG. 71, between the start of the second battle effect and the time before the ally characters are replaced (FIGS. 71 (a) to (b)).
Is not clear whether the battle effect being executed is the first battle effect, the second battle effect, or the third battle effect, and is between the time when the ally character is replaced and the time before the enemy character is replaced (Fig. 71 (Fig. 71). In c) to (e), it is found that the battle effect being executed is not the first battle effect, but it is not clear whether it is the second battle effect or the third battle effect. Therefore, it is possible to continue the interest of the player from the start of the second battle effect to the replacement of the enemy characters.

In the example shown in FIG. 71, the enemy characters are replaced after the ally characters are replaced, but in the second battle production of the pattern in which the characters are replaced (that is, the number of ally characters = 2 and the number of enemy characters = 2). , The enemy character may be exchanged after the ally character is exchanged, the ally character may be exchanged after the enemy character is exchanged, or the ally character and the enemy character may be exchanged at the same time. If the ally characters are replaced after the enemy characters are replaced, it is possible to continue the interest of the player from the start of the second battle effect to the replacement of the ally characters.

Further, in the case of the third battle effect in this modified example, for example, as shown in FIG. 70, from the start of the third battle effect to before the ally characters are replaced (FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (b)).
It is not clear whether the ongoing battle production is the 1st battle production, the 2nd battle production, or the 3rd battle production, and from the time when the ally characters are replaced until the end of the 3rd battle production ( In FIGS. 70 (c) to 70 (e), it is clear that the battle effect being executed is not the first battle effect, but it is not clear whether it is the second battle effect or the third battle effect. Therefore, it is possible to continue the interest of the player from the start to the end of the third battle production.

As described above, according to this modification, a special gaming state is generated in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special character variation display game) is a special result. A specific effect executing means (effect control device 300) for executing a specific effect (battle effect) capable of suggesting an expectation degree (big hit expectation degree) is provided, and the specific effect executing means is selected from the first character group. One character (friend character) and a second character (enemy character) selected from the second character group are displayed on the display device 41, and a plurality of characters in the first character group are displayed during execution of the specific effect. In addition to being displayable, a plurality of characters in the second character group can be displayed, and the total number of first characters (number of ally characters) displayed during the execution of the specific effect is N (N ≧ 1), and the specific effect is displayed. When the total number of second characters (number of enemy characters) displayed during the execution of is M (M ≧ 1), the larger the NM, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

With this configuration, the difference between the total number of first characters (number of ally characters) and the total number of second characters (number of enemy characters) displayed from the start to the end of the specific effect (battle effect) Since the jackpot expectation of a specific production is different, the variation of the specific production increases,
It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by a specific effect in which a plurality of characters appear.
It should be noted that what is suggested by the specific effect (battle effect) is not limited to the jackpot expectation, and may be, for example, the expectation that reach will occur.
Further, in this modification, the upper limit of N (the number of ally characters) is set to 2, but the upper limit of N is not limited to 2. In this modified example, the upper limit of M (number of enemy characters) is 2, but the upper limit of M is 2.
Not limited to.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, one ally character and one ally character are exchanged, but one ally character and a plurality of ally characters may be exchanged, or a plurality of ally characters may be exchanged. One ally character may be exchanged, or a plurality of ally characters and a plurality of ally characters may be exchanged. For example, the ally character A and the ally character B may be exchanged with the ally character C, and in this case, the number of ally characters = 3.
Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 69 and 71, one enemy character and one enemy character are exchanged, but one enemy character and a plurality of enemy characters may be exchanged, or a plurality of enemy characters may be exchanged. And one enemy character may be exchanged, or a plurality of enemy characters and a plurality of enemy characters may be exchanged. For example, the enemy character A and the enemy character B may be exchanged with the enemy character C and the enemy character D. In this case, the number of enemy characters = 4.

<Transformation example 2 of battle production>
The jackpot expectation may be suggested by the number of attacks of the characters instead of the number of characters. In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), a battle effect of "number of ally attacks (number of attacks of ally characters) = 1, number of enemy attacks (number of attacks of enemy characters) = 2" and "friends" Battle production of "number of attacks = 2, number of enemy attacks = 1" and "number of ally attacks = 3, number of enemy attacks = 0"
It is possible to execute three types of battle productions.
FIG. 72 shows an example of a battle effect of “number of ally attacks = 1, number of enemy attacks = 2”. FIG. 72
In the battle effect shown in FIG. 72, for example, as shown in FIGS. 72 (f), the ally character attacks once between the start and end of the battle effect, and as shown in FIGS. 72 (d) and 72 (e), for example. The enemy character is attacking twice between the start and end of the battle production. Further, in the battle effect shown in FIG. 72, since the ally character has won, the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is a big hit.

If the result is off or a small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), "number of ally attacks =
The battle effect of "1, number of enemy attacks = 2" is most likely to be selected, and "number of ally attacks = 3, number of enemy attacks ="
The battle production of "0" is the most difficult to select. When the result is a big hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the battle effect of "number of ally attacks = 3, number of enemy attacks = 0" is most likely to be selected, and "number of ally attacks = 1, enemy". The battle effect of "number of attacks = 2" is the most difficult to select.
Therefore, in this modified example, the battle effect of "number of ally attacks = 1, number of enemy attacks = 2"<
Expectations for big hits are high in the order of "number of ally attacks = 2, number of enemy attacks = 1" battle production <"number of ally attacks = 3, number of enemy attacks = 0". That is, when the number of ally attacks is N (N ≧ 1) and the number of enemy attacks is M (M ≧ 0), the larger the NM, the higher the expectation of a big hit. for that reason,
In this modified example, the result of the special figure variation display game being executed can be suggested by the number of attacks of the character appearing in the battle effect.

The number of attacks may be the number of moves, for example, as in the battle effect shown in FIG. 73. In the example shown in FIG. 73, the ally character "punch!" By banging the opponent once with a knack.
(See Fig. 73 (b) and (d)) and the technique called "Triple Punch!" (See Fig. 73 (c)) that bangs the opponent three times in a row. .. In "Triple Punch!", The actual number of attacks is three, but the number of moves is one (that is,
Since the number of steps is three, but one technique), in the example shown in FIG. 73, the number of attacks of the ally character is updated by +1 as shown in FIG. 73 (c). As a result, even if the number of attacks is limited, various techniques can be made to appear, which enhances the interest. In addition, the jackpot expectation may differ depending on the type of technique.

In addition, in this modification, the case where the result of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed this time is a small hit and the case where
It is configured to use the same battle effect distribution table (for example, FIG. 72A) in the case of outliers, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, when the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed this time is a small hit, the type of the battle effect to be executed is determined by referring to the battle effect distribution table for the small hit, and the special figure variation to be executed this time. If the result of the display game is out of order, the type of battle effect to be executed may be determined by referring to the battle effect distribution table for the outlier.

As described above, according to this modification, a special gaming state is generated in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special character variation display game) is a special result. It is equipped with a specific effect execution means (effect control device 300) that executes a specific effect (battle effect) that can suggest the degree of expectation (big hit expectation), and in the specific effect, the first character selected from the first character group. (Friend character) and the second character (enemy character) selected from the second character group are displayed on the display device 41, and the number of specific action effects (number of ally attacks) for the second character of the first character. Is N (N ≧ 1), and when the number of specific action effects (number of enemy attacks) for the first character of the second character is M (M ≧ 0), N−
The larger M is, the higher the expectation of big hit can be configured.

With this configuration, the number of specific action effects (number of ally attacks) of the first character and the number of specific action effects (number of enemy attacks) of the second character from the start to the end of the specific effect (battle effect) Since the jackpot expectation of the specific effect differs depending on the difference, the variation of the specific effect increases, and the fun of the game can be enhanced by the specific effect in which a plurality of characters appear.

It should be noted that what is suggested by the specific effect (battle effect) is not limited to the jackpot expectation, and may be, for example, the expectation that reach will occur.
In addition, it may be possible to execute a battle effect of "number of ally attacks = 0, number of enemy attacks = 3". At that time, for example, as shown in FIGS. 74A to 74B, if the result is off or a small hit, the battle effect of "number of ally attacks = 0, number of enemy attacks = 3" cannot be selected. You may. As a result, the battle effect that wins even if the ally character does not attack can be set as the big hit confirmation effect. With this configuration, it is possible to perform an exceptional battle effect that deviates from the rule that the larger the NM (number of ally attacks-number of enemy attacks), the higher the expectation of a big hit. Increase.
Further, in this modification, N + M (number of ally attacks + number of enemy attacks) = 3, that is, N + M is fixed at 3, but N + M may be fixed at a value other than 3, or may vary.
Further, the number of specific motion effects is not limited to the number of attacks. The number of specific operation effects is, for example,
It may be any one of the number of times the opponent character is attacked, the number of times the opponent character resists the attack, and the number of times the opponent character avoids the attack, or it may be the total number of any of them. ..

Further, the battle effect of the embodiment or the battle effect of the modification 1 and the battle effect of the modification 2 may be combined.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 74 (c) to 74 (d), the first battle effect of "number of ally attacks = 1, number of enemy attacks = 2" and "number of ally attacks = 2, number of enemy attacks". The first battle production of "= 1" and "
Makes it possible to execute three types of first battle effects, which are "number of ally attacks = 3 and number of enemy attacks = 0". As for the second battle production, three types of second battle production can be executed in the same way, and the third
As for the battle production, three types of third battle production can be executed in the same manner. Then, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher in the order of the first battle production <second battle production <third battle production. Furthermore, in the first battle production, the larger the NM (number of ally attacks-number of enemy attacks), the higher the expectation of a big hit, that is, "number of ally attacks = 1, number of enemy attacks = 2". 1 battle production <"number of ally attacks = 2, number of enemy attacks = 1" 1st battle production <"number of ally attacks = 3, number of enemy attacks = 0" so that the jackpot expectation increases in that order Set to. Similarly, the second battle production is set so that the larger the NM is, the higher the jackpot expectation is, and the third battle production is also set so that the larger the NM is, the higher the jackpot expectation is. Is also good.
With this configuration, the variation of the battle production becomes more diverse, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game by the battle production.

Also, for example, when executing an effect of whether or not the number of ally characters and enemy characters increases and then performing an effect of attacking by ally characters and enemy characters, the number of ally characters is N, the number of enemy characters is M, and the number of ally characters is M. When the number of attacks is n and the number of enemy attacks is m, one of the cases with the highest expectation and the lowest expectation is N-M = n-m and N> M (the number of ally characters is large and allies). The number of attacks is also large), the other is NM = nm and N <M (the number of ally characters is small, the number of ally attacks is also small), and the case where the degree of expectation is relatively high is NM> n-m. (The number of ally characters is larger than the number of enemy characters, but the number of ally attacks is the same as the number of enemy attacks or less than the number of enemy attacks), and when the degree of expectation is relatively low, NM <nm (friend characters) The number may be the same as the number of enemy characters or less than the number of enemy characters, but the number of ally attacks is larger than the number of enemy attacks). With this configuration, if the differences are the same, either the highest degree of expectation or the lowest degree of expectation is obtained, so that the interest is likely to improve. In addition, since the order of production changes from increasing the number of characters to attacking, if the number of ally characters is small, increasing the number of ally attacks can maintain the interest.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as the gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 25 Production button (operation means, first operation means)
29 Touch panel (second operating means)
41 Display device 300 Effect control device (confirmation control means, promotion effect execution means, explanatory effect execution means, specific effect execution means)
G11 production button image (first promotion image)
G21 touch panel image (second promotion image)
G31 protruding button image (second promotion image)
M1 1st character information (character information)
M2 2nd character information (character information)
M3 3rd character information (character information)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result.
A first operating means that can be converted into a first state and a second state,
A second operating means different from the first operating means,
A confirmation control means for confirming the state of the first operating means and
A promotion effect executing means for executing a promotion effect for urging the player to operate the first operation means or the second operation means is provided.
The promotion effect is
A first promotion effect in which a first promotion image imitating the first operation means in the first state is displayed, and
A second promotion effect in which a second promotion image imitating the first operation means in the second state is displayed, and
Including a third promotion effect in which a third promotion image for prompting the operation of the second operation means is displayed.
When the execution of the second promotion effect is determined and the confirmation by the confirmation control means confirms that the first operation means is not in the first state, the promotion effect execution means is used.
A gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined process is executed instead of the process of executing the second promotion effect.

Images